JP2020120750A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress interference between a signal line and an enable line.SOLUTION: A game machine in which, when a stop result of a game is a special result, a special game state advantageous for a player can be generated, includes a substrate on which a plurality of signal lines for communicating with a predetermined circuit, and an enable line for enabling an operation of the predetermined circuit are wired. In the substrate, an interval between the enable line and the predetermined signal line is larger than a minimum interval between the plurality of signal lines.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a game stop result is a special result.

Conventionally, a board (in which a signal line for communicating with another board (for example, a relay board) is wired (
For example, there is a game machine including a game control device and a main board (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-12359, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the wiring interval is not taken into consideration, and interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) may occur between the signal line for communication and other wiring such as the enable line. was there.

An object of the present invention is to suppress interference between a signal line and an enable line.

In a typical form of the present invention, a plurality of signal lines for communicating with a predetermined circuit in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a game stop result is a special result. And a enable line that enables the operation of the predetermined circuit are wired, and in the substrate, the distance between the enable line and the predetermined signal line is smaller than the minimum distance between the plurality of signal lines. Is also wide.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to suppress interference between the signal line and the enable line.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing of 2 bytes. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of general-purpose game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is the table figure which illustrates the expectation degree which becomes the big hit for execution form of each announcement production. It is a figure explaining the example of the discernment mode of the 1st notice production, and is a figure showing an example of the display screen of a display. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the discernment mode of the 2nd notice production, and is a figure showing an example of the display screen of a display. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the 1) of the screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the 2) of a screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is another example (the 1) of the screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is another example (the 2) of the screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a modification of the screen transition when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game. It is a modification of the table diagram which illustrates the points related to the expectation degree of the big hit for the execution mode of each notice effect. It is a timing chart when a notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect. It is an example of a timing chart when the production control device according to the second embodiment executes a suggested production. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the second embodiment in chronological order, and is an example (part 1) of the screen transition when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the second embodiment in time series, and is an example (part 2) of the screen transition when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. It is the 1st modification and the 2nd modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is the 3rd modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is the 4th modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is the 5th modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is an example of a timing chart when executing the effect control device suggestive effect according to the comparative example. It is a front view of the game board of the game machine of the third embodiment. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is the figure which expanded the part enclosed by the dashed-dotted line in FIG. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of Drawing 44) of a rotator unit, and is a figure (the 1) showing a state of a game ball in rotator unit 800. It is a top view (AA sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 44) of a rotating body unit, and is a figure (part 2) showing the state of the game balls in the rotating body unit 800. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of Drawing 44) of a rotator unit, and is a figure (the 3) showing the state of a game ball in a rotator unit. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing of a 3rd embodiment. It is a top view (AA sectional view taken on the line of Drawing 44) of a rotary body unit which constitutes the 1st modification of the game machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of Drawing 44) of a rotary body unit which constitutes the 2nd modification of the game machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a perspective view of the 3rd modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the distribution apparatus which comprises the 3rd modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 4th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st distribution unit which comprises the 4th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd distribution unit which comprises the 5th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation|movement of the distribution of the game ball by a 2nd distribution unit. It is the graph which compared the probability density distribution of the start value of the game machine of 3rd execution form and the probability density distribution of the start value of the former game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit of the periphery of a game microcomputer and each driver IC chip. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit of the periphery of the game microcomputer and the IC chip for solenoid drivers. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit of the periphery of a game microcomputer and a connector part. It is a figure explaining the example 1 of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the example 2 of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the example 3 of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the example of wiring (modification) when a chip select line is omitted about the example of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit (electronic circuit) of the periphery of a connector part and a serial-parallel conversion circuit on a relay board.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame which is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable/closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to a game state.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). Projection production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 is a production device that produces a light emission production or the like according to the progress of the game. Projection production unit 13
The lighting member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By the player operating the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in a special figure variation display game (game) displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific game state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability change state), big hit state (
It is a special game state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probability variation state when a big hit occurs, or to provide a winning device or the like with a specific area to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device is the force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area.
It is possible to change the launch force corresponding to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and to launch the game ball in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
With 0a. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30a is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the. The gaming machine 10,
The game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball shooting device to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of a variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inlet 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the, and a stage portion 40b capable of rolling the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37,
The game ball rolled on the stage 40b is easy to win in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a condition for starting the special figure variation display game, and immediately below that is a second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). An ordinary variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is normally opened to change to an open state in which the game balls normally flow into the variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure changing display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure changing display game to be higher than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the easy prize winning state than the easy prize winning state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that the probability change state (
Even when the latent latency change state is excluded), a time saving state (universal support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variation winning device 37, the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).
The special variation winning device 39 having an attacker type opening/closing door 39c that opens the big winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts a state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and a big prize is awarded. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (special winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. Further, a light emitting member that illuminates the special winning opening is arranged in or near the special winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variation winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning hole), the probability changes after the big hit ends (
High probability state, specific game state) is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass only in the case of the probability variation big hit. The game control device 100 can detect passage of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) through a sensor (a specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. In addition to confirming that it is done, information (a specific area passing command or the like) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 displays the V winnings on the display device 4.
It can be notified in 1.

General winning a prize mouth 35, starting winning a prize mouth 36, normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37, and special fluctuation winning a prize device 39
When a game ball is won in the special winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Also, the regular variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, there is an outlet 30 for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.
b is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like, and a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 display device, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for public figure variation display game (public figure display device, lamps D10, D18), and the number of start (hold) memories stored in each variation display game A memory display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56),
have. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2
The hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D8),
The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state, the probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on becomes a high probability state. The third game status display section 59 (third game status display, probability status display section, lamp D17) that indicates that the round display at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) The section 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be configured by a group of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked) and cyclically turned on (either one). One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs may be turned on/off (blinking) or cyclic lighting. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the public figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1, the special figure 2 display 52 can be configured as appropriate.

Further, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighting display and a non-displaying display as a symbol (fourth special symbol) (a blinking indicator) (
LED) and a lamp display section (LED) for informing the number of starting (holding) memories of each special figure variation display game
) Has. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).
The lamp display unit (LED) for informing the number of starting (holding) memory of each special figure variation display game finishes displaying the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but when it is not in the big hitting state (reach on the display device 41 described later). (Including the case where is occurring), the number of holdings is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

A random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored in the universal figure starting memory, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game is won and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in the lighted state and a deviation when the light is in the off state. By blinking this LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is the hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
In addition to being stored with a predetermined upper limit number, the game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as start winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored with a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the start winning prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning storages for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The number of the special figure start winning prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4 is also displayed.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100, the special figure 2 display 52 special figure 2 based on the winning or the second start memory to the normal variation winning device 37.
Run the floating display game.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), the identification information in the special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52 ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol). Also,
On the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling is started in a predetermined order, the changing symbols are stopped in sequence after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special map variation display game, as another decorative special pattern (identification information), in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating lighting (flashing) and blinking (off). (4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display unit is stopped by "lighting" in the case of off and "lighting out" in the case of big hit.

On the contrary, the variable display of the lamp display section (LED) as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) can be stopped by "turning off" in the case of a big hit and "lighting" in the case of a big hit. .. Also, a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs (fourth pattern LEDs) are provided as each lamp display unit, one of the plurality of LEDs is turned on in the case of a failure, and a plurality of all LEDs are turned on in the case of a big hit It is possible.

When the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special map 1 display 51 or In the display device 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).
That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens greatly until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36 is
a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch 39a in the normal variation winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that utilizes a game ball to detect the game ball is used. Further, the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10
A micro switch having a mechanical contact is used for the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the etc. and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. be able to.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in a centralized manner, and has a CPU section for a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are included in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the power failure to the game control device 100. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100).
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after being supplied to the built-in RAM) and during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure occurrence when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
Processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like to make the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting relating to the game condition (game) changeable. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability (only when there is a small hit), but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability. Can be changed according to the probability setting value. Setting key switch 93 and RAM
The initialization switch 112 constitutes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a dedicated set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that the front frame 12 (main body frame) cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 levels, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It will be changed like... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value of 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), the variation before reaching the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is provided as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected degree is different), Special 1 Reach (SP1 Reach), Special 2 Reach (SP)
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach are set.
It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining a big hit random number for determining a big hit in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Pattern random numbers (only when there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the variable display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) etc. A random number generation circuit for generating the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (
A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (millisecond)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the original clock signal is provided.

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure change display game to have a game result (big hit or miss), the special figure change display game as the current game state, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state), and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a variation allocation information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to drive the payout motor 91 according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 has an electric wave sensor 62 (a board electric wave sensor) for detecting the emission of an electric wave to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variation winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 are connected to these. The high level supplied from the switch is 11
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as a low level of 7V at V and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
Detects the passage (V winning) of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game ball from the special variation winning device 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a switch 63, a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame), and a vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of the gaming machine 10.
The signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on input of touch switch provided on operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
There is provided a first input port 122 which receives a signal from 12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST is output to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine, which is an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that it is in the impossible state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-injection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-fire testing device.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a normal variation winning device 37 (a solenoid solenoid) 37c, a special variation winning device 39 to open a special winning opening solenoid 39b (big winning solenoid), A second output port 134 for outputting the opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86 is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

Further, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 has a universal solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
The first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives and outputs the opening/closing data signal of the c or the special winning opening solenoid 39b and outputs the solenoid driving signal, and the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, Fifth output port 13
Fourth, which outputs an external information signal supplied from 7 to an external device such as a management device to an external information terminal 71
A driver 138d is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
12V DC is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of FIG. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal through the digit line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. L sequentially selected by
The power supply voltage flows to the ED and it is turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photo coupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and displays the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display, as a performance display, a display probability setting value, a character ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
Is the total of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the outlet 30b. The number of discharged balls counts the signal of the out-ball detection switch 74, etc.
Can be obtained by doing. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), and the special variation winning device 39 (large winning opening).

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shots), (
Calculated as (number of balls acquired/number of balls discharged)×100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the winning character ratio is in the state of big hit among the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening (=so-called continuous character ratio). In addition, the ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize hole and the ordinary variable prize device 37 (the second starting prize hole) (=the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) that is generally used. )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 including a ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, and the sound source LSI 314.
To perform reproduction sound instruction, lighting of a decorative lamp, drive control of a motor or a solenoid, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
Through the 31, the decorative special figure reservation number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board production device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. The panel display device 46 includes the above-mentioned lamp display device 8
It may include 0.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic parts controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools each part of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts the random number value for hit determination of the universal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34 and stores it in the ROM 111b. The judgment result is compared with the judgment value, and the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is judged.

Then, on the public figure display 53, the identification pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the general figure variability display game is displayed in a stopped state. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure display 53, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is off, control is performed to display the result mode of the off on the general figure display device 53.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 to the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). To make.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and control of light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such a condition is achieved, and this is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (repetition) control (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. High probability state (probability change state)
The probability of a winning result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state.
It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplication support is executed by overlapping and shortening the state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time)
It is possible to perform a time-shortening variation to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
You may set so that 7b may not be opened (universal figure probability is 0). In addition, either one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected when a hit occurs. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the time saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, depending on the on/off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes).

When the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a setting changeable state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 5B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

Although the setting key switch 93 is off when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 11
When 2 is turned on, it shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and R
The AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 forming the main control means
Waiting time for waiting until the program of the secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 (for example, 3
Seconds) is set. Thus, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
(00, etc.) to form a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures the time using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, there is a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A1008).
1010).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power outage occurs by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus. Yes (A1008). When a power failure has occurred (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

If the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 (the result of A1008 is “N”)
The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1010 is “N”), that is, when the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0, the game control device 100 (the result of A1010 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to a read/write memory (RWM) such as a RAM or an EEPROM that allows reading and writing is permitted (A1011), and OFF data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port installed in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) circuit is started (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillating signal (original clock signal) from the oscillating circuit 113 into a frequency dividing circuit and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
It is provided with a CTC circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit to U111a.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 is an RA indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c).
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, the flag indicating the abnormality is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (A101
The result of 6 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is “Y”), the RAM is normal and the RAM indicates an abnormality.
The abnormality flag is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 has a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether or not both switches are ON (A1021). When both switches are ON (result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), the game control device 100 has RAM (here, RAM).
111c) whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), step A103
1-A1037 processing during probability setting confirmation (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
The processing of 041, A1045, and A1046 when the power is normally turned on (when the power is restored) is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023)
Result is “Y”), a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024).
.. The effect control device 300 which has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
Notify that there was 0 abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (“E1” in FIG. 9C).
Error display data of “” is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 for display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying an abnormality to an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
Wait for the power to be turned on by performing both ON operations of 12). While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
Both of the ON operations of 1) are not executed, but if the probability setting changing flag is set, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting is changed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even if the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 also when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), the command of the main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and 7 segments when the game is stopped. The display data (error display data "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the on-data of the security signal is externally output to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. It is output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). Note that, similarly to the above, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. Then, step A10
25 and the processing of A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
)), since it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, after clearing the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028). ), a probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
)), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, the command of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1
030) and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation (during setting confirmation state) process is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is displayed in the effect control device 30.
0 (production control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
The processing at the time of power failure 61 is executed.

As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, the probability variable can be changed in the setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode), or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036)
The result is “Y”), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a notification end command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization processing (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform normal processing of.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
.. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is “Y”), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. .. The performance information is derived on the basis of the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and, for example, the winning rate, the base value (the winning rate in the normal gaming state), the role ratio, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
The result of 041 is “N”), and since both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, normal power-on processing (at power recovery) is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value when power is restored (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A10.
The processing moves to 47.

The command for RAM initialization sent by the process of step A1044 and the command for restoration of power failure sent by the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and holding of special figures 1 and 2 Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state command (high-probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence/absence of time saving state, special figure variation in predetermined production mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

Further, in the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery, a setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating setting value information (setting information) which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 need only send the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command, for example,
The customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM of the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 is displayed.
Notification of initialization (RAM clear) is performed for 30 seconds. In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command that designates the display content of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command to specify the screen is normally in process for both Toku-zu 1 and 2 (when it is neither changing nor hitting).
, A customer waiting demo command, and a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number) (only when there is small hit), hit random number to determine hit of ordinary figure Saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as a start value of an initial value (random initial value random number), an initial value of a falling lottery random number used in a falling lottery (falling random number initial value random number), etc. (A1048),
The interrupt is permitted (A1049). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However,
The big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are the timer interrupt process which is the processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) different from CTC0).

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the hit symbol random number, the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (such as a character ratio and a ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054).
When no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
.. Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged when re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input process of reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is “Y”), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

The game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A130).
4 is "N"), an output for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (for example, a special winning opening solenoid 39b) or LED drive control (light emission control) based on the output data set in various processes. The process is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. Processing 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and the error monitoring (the front frame and the glass frame are opened) The winning opening switch/state monitoring process for checking whether or not it is performed (A1310)
).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1315 and thereafter are executed.

The game control device 100, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”)
The special figure game processing for performing the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312). The details of the special figure game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1313). A segment LED edit process for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying a special figure variation game and various information regarding a game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes vibration irregularity monitoring processing for monitoring irregularity due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring processing, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special winning opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and the remaining ball discharging opening switch 73 of the special variation winning device 39. Is monitored, and the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 is a specific area switch 7
2 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging port switch 73 to be discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank designation is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning to the register bank 0 or the processing for returning to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y”), set probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is the display probability setting value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among hall-related persons, if the probability setting values are different, but the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). The same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (the game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
To (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407)
If the result is “N”), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The gaming control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407)
If the result is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

The game control device 100, if it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A240
The result of 8 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2).
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends.

The game control device 100, when there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409)
Is “Y”), the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5, and the probability of the probability setting value area is associated with the work setting value. The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. A value corresponding to the probability set value read from the probability set value area (1 from the probability set value is stored in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) for storing the work set value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the work set value. However, the work set value in the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”).
)), the value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change (A1037
It is possible to prevent a situation where the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, or the like is changed to an unintended value when the result is “Y”).

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variation winning device 37 that forms the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Before the start of the game, a game result pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the game result based on winning. In addition,
Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number (A2607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100
The special figure normal processing that monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game and sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the information necessary for performing the processing during special figure fluctuation It is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
A special figure changing process is executed to set a stop display time of the special figure and information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process (A2609). For example, in the special figure changing process, necessary information such as the symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number “2” relating to the special symbol displaying process is set. Set it and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, to set fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, to set fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and to perform processing during fanfare/interval The special figure displaying process for setting the information necessary for the process is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a fanfare command and fanfare time is set, and the processing number "3" related to the processing during the fanfare/interval is set. Save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
The fanfare/interval processing is performed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" relating to the processing during the big winning opening is set. Set it and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set an interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the processing for opening the special winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, and the processing number "5" related to the processing for remaining the special winning opening is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the jackpot and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing etc. It is executed (A2613). For example, in the process of opening the special winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set to the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
Special figure Performs the jackpot end process that sets the information required to execute the normal process (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state ends or the Poden support state after the jackpot state ends ( Necessary information such as (time saving state) is set, and the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area. The probability variation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (probability state (high probability/low probability)) after the big hit state ends and the number of continuous games (time shortening change count, power support count) in the Hoden support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends. ) Information is included.

When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning slot 36 (
When the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes of step A2709 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A
When the result of 2704 is “N”), the processes of step A2707 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier to win to the left at the starting winning opening 36, and to the normal variation winning device 37, it is not necessary to win at the right unless it is right hitting. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 gives an instruction to instruct right-handing (
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). If there is no winning in the 2nd starting prize hole (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second start winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric auditors product is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric power illegality is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal wins to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the ordinary electric fraud is occurring. In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegality of normal electric power generation is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). The special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the illegality of electric power generation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second
Prevent further generation of starting memory.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process in the starting port switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and execute the step A
The processing moves to 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
913). In the special figure hold information determination process, the pre-reading stop design command corresponding to the saved big hit random number or the stop design information based on the big hit design random number, and the first half variation number (number of variation before reach) based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 And a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the latter half variation number (number of variation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as an effect command (A2914), and an effect command setting process (A2915) is executed to make the special figure starter switch common. The process ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at an upper limit is formed. Also,
The starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. , Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, when the special map 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3211), and when the customer waiting demo is not started (A3211). If the result is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (
(A3213), effect command setting processing is performed (A3214), and the process proceeds to step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demo has been started (A32
The result of No. 11 is “Y”), and “0” related to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215).
), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3216), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal process is ended.

Further, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
)), the special figure 2 variation start processing is executed (A3202), and a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3204). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting processing of special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

Further, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
)), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (A3207), and a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 1 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared as an effect command (A3208).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3209). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting processing of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before checking the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100).
If there is a second starting memory, the priority control means executes the variable display game based on the second starting memory with priority over the variable display game based on the first starting memory.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information is executed for the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing, the stop symbol number at the time of falling off or at the time of big hit, and the falling stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Further, the number-of-rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stopped symbol number and the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number are acquired and saved.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
.. Next, the game control device 100 executes fluctuation start information setting processing for setting information on fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure reservation number related to the special figure classification (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrement by 1).

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first executes the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special flag 2 variation flag indicating is saved in the variation symbol determination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 2 variable display game (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A36).
01). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determining process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. It saves (A3606) and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (A
The result of 3605 is “N”), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the process of setting the big hit flag 1 shown in FIG. 13 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Then, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (A
The result of 3705 is “N”), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of (A3605, A3704) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807), and the big hit judgment process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 802 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is the high probability state (probability change state) (A3803). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”).
), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3806 is "N"), and a big hit is set as a determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the special figure information setting process (A340) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes is set in accordance with the probability state, the presence/absence of a time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variable group selection pointer table (A
4201), obtain the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4).
202). Next, set the first half variable group selection offset table (A4203)
, The target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are acquired (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206).
). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 area is saved with the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number of holdings, so that the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations as a result in cases other than the case where the number of holdings is large. A fluctuation group contains multiple fluctuation patterns.When deciding a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variable group selection pointer table (A
4207), the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (A4).
208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209).
, Acquire offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern (A42).
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the obtained value in the variation allocation information 2 area (A4212).
), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, since the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending calls is large), as a result, in cases other than failure, the number of pending calls is distributed in the latter half of the fluctuation. Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
3406, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and the second half variation pattern that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A430
1), obtain the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare (A4302), and load the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1). , Prepare (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and for deviating. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the hit occurrence rate, and even 1 byte is sufficient, so the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is off (A4304), and if it is off (result of A4304 is “Y”), performs 2-byte allocation processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (result of A4304 is “N”), distribution processing (A4306) is performed and step A
The processing shifts to 4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares it (A4307), and stores the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding). The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the formula 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, the allocation processing is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number is saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table (first-half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reserved 1). 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). afterwards,
Allocation processing (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the first half variation number area is saved (A4316), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. Two
The byte allocation process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table.
In the latter half variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is out of range) that prescribes only the latter half variation selection table with “no reach”, since the distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0” is set. That is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the top data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result. Then, (A4407), the 2-byte allocation process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the selection table (latter half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (latter half variation group table) is specified. A value is acquired (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404).
Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405.
A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value already determined in (A44
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

It is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4).
It is executed until the result of 405 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). When it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407) and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the distribution process (A4306, A4309, A43) in the fluctuation pattern setting process.
Details of 15) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. In the distribution process, based on the variation pattern random number 2, the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group), or based on the variation pattern random number 3, the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). It is checked whether is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are associated with at least one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number), and predetermined. However, in the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value "0", that is, the code without allocation, is specified at the beginning.

Then, the game control device 100, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (
The first distribution value defined in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. And a new random number value is calculated (A45
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503, and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505, the new random number value is set to "0".
It is performed until it is determined that the value is smaller than ("A4505 result is "Y"). As a result, at least one second-half variation selection table, second-half variation pattern (second-half variation number), and first-half variation pattern (first-half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table). Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) are selected from the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "Y"), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), and the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
3407, A3507) will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604) and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4).
605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460.
6), the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop symbol, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the public figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored and the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the public figure.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the gaming control device 100,
Regular figure normal processing that monitors the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing processing during the universal figure variation Execute (A7608). Details of the normal/universal processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the figure, in order to shift to the process of displaying figure, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the figure game processing number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. The general figure display processing is executed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general figure hit processing (A7610). For example, in the processing for displaying a figure, in the case where the result of the figure changing display game is a hit, in order to shift to the processing for hitting a figure, "3" is set as the game processing number and the figure processing number area is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the game processing number is set to “0” and the game processing number is saved in the general/universal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal/universal processing routine processing.

If the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process of hitting the normal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle process in the figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal figure hitting process, after setting the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, the game process number is set to "4" in order to shift to the normal ball remaining ball process. Save to the universal figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining ball process that sets information necessary to perform the end-of-universal figure process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal ball remaining ball process, in order to shift to the general-universal-game end process, "5" is set as the game process number and saved in the general-university game process number area, and the general-university ending time is set in the general-university game. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the universal figure ending process, "0" is set as the game process number and the game is saved in the universal figure game process number area in order to shift to the regular figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (A7604).
If the result is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 is executed.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved universal figures is 0 (result of A7901 is “Y”), the routine setting transition processing 1 of regular figures is executed (A7923), and the routine processing of regular figures ends. Normal figure Normal processing Migration setting processing 1
Then, in order to shift to the normal figure normal process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the general figure game process number area.

Further, the game control device 100, if the universal figure holding number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "
N”), a random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) per universal figure of RWM, and RWM is loaded.
The random number per symbol is loaded from the per symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A7902)
.. And a random number storage area per figure (for 1 number of reservations) and a pattern random number storage area per figure (1 number of reservations)
0) is cleared (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in a high probability of being in a regular figure (during a high probability state), that is, a time saving state (
It is determined whether or not it is in the universal communication support state (A7904). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7905).
), if it is during the high probability of universal figure (the result of A7904 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the high probability of universal figure is set (A7906), and step A7907 is set. Process shifts to.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. When the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is “Y”), that is,
If the result is yes, the process moves to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

The game control device 100, when the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a loss, the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (A7909).
.. Further, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7910), and the deviation symbol information is saved in the universal figure stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value, the game control device 100 (the result of A7908 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7912), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7913), and a hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number. The stop symbol information is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
5), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, a public figure command corresponding to information related to the general figure fluctuation display game (particularly, hit/miss information of the general figure fluctuation display game) is prepared as an effect command (A7917), and effect command setting processing is executed. (A7918). Then, the random number storage area per universal figure is shifted (A7919),
After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7920), the number of reserved universal figures is updated by -1 (A7).
921).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of retained figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a process transition setting process during universal figure fluctuation (A7922),
End normal processing. In the universal figure changing process transition setting process, in order to shift to the universal figure changing process, "1" is set as the game process number and saved in the universal figure game process number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 23
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003) and permit interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes an RTC reading process of reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the effect control device 300 is powered on (that is, the game machine 10 is powered on) (for example, by changing the position of the RTC reading process, steps B0003 and B0004). May be run between). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM,
RT is read once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 in a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on.
When the time information is read from C338, the time timer (time measuring means) may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. And production control device 300 may perform various processing using a timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and at the end of the game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process of editing and controlling the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and saves the power of the gaming machine 10 waiting for the customer. A power saving control process for controlling is executed (B0016).

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0019 is “N”), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is frame switching timing (result of B0019 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling the performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory motion effect for driving the motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0023 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), the contents of the received command buffer in RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual items. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read in the order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is “Y” when the copying is completed.
)), the received command content in the analysis command area is loaded (B1107), and the received command analysis processing for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 24) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows an effect control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command analysis process executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION part for the MODE part determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern or the like of the decorative special symbol, and there is, for example, a variation command (A3407). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit type command (
B1207). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a big hit, and for example, a fanfare command (A2610) for instructing a fanfare screen or a round screen is commanded. Round command (A2611), an interval command (A2612) for instructing an interval screen, and an ending command (A2611) for instructing an ending screen
A2612) and the like. If the MODE part indicates a big hit type command (B1
The result of 207 is "Y"), the big hit system command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (
B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include, for example, decorative special drawing commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern. If the MODE part represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210).
), the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol-based command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot system command (B
1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a one-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The read-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a read-ahead stop symbol command (A2
913). Then, when the MODE part indicates a prefetching symbol type command (B121
The result of 3 is "Y"), the prefetch symbol type command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then the MODE section determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation system command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). When the MODE part indicates the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302) and terminates the single-shot system command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (
When the result of B1303 is “Y”), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single-shot system command process ends.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). When the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
The result of 05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command (B1
The result of 305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). When the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B130
The result of No. 7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131).
2), single-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (B1315). The error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state-on command, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) or a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (
(B1316), the single-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then causes the MODE section to execute a command for effect mode switching (process during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “N”), then the production control device 300 indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball count command indicating the out ball count. It is determined whether or not (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1).
320) and terminates the single command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (B
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is step A in FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command at the time of power recovery from 1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. When the MODE part represents the set value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the set value information command (B
The result of 1323 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a command for setting change, for example, a command (A
1030). When the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (B13
The result of No. 25 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command of the setting change system (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As a command for setting confirmation, for example, the command (
A1033). When the MODE part indicates a command for setting confirmation, (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the command of the symbol stop includes, for example, a symbol stop command of the special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of the special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). And MODE
When the part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether the command in the MODE part is a normal command (B13).
30).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”)
The production control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols stop (B1332), and ends the single shot system command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to "changing", "big hit" or "small hit" depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
)) or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is “N”)
In effect, the production control device 300 ends the single-shot system command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute a process for a command not shown in FIG.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol or a 4R probability variation big hit symbol (4R-A1, symbol 1), 4R normal jackpot symbol (4R-A2).
, Design 2), 8R probability variation big hit design (8R-A1, design 3), 8R normal big hit design (8R-
A2, design 4), 12R probability variation big hit design (12R-A1, design 5), 12R normal big hit design (12R-A2, design 6).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1 of the fluctuation command which is received (fluctuation command)
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special map type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (result of B1903 is "Y")
, The variable system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the variation type command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), it determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (variation command) (B1).
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect which is the effect during change is executed (B19).
05). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable system command process (FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, the model code,
The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, effect mode, and setting information (setting value) is set (B2002), and it corresponds to the MODE part of the variable system command (variable command) and the number of holdings of the special figure type. Acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation is with reach, the production control device 300, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the variable system command (fluctuation command) M
The address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) is set (B2007), and the ACT of the variable system command is set. The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the department is obtained (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010).
It should be noted that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the notice (B2011). After that, the stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variable effect (B2013) and the display setting of the notice effect (B2014). Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and, for example, the display of decreasing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set (B201).
5). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect contents. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special map variation corresponding to the special drawing type (B
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition,
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Execution mode of notice production and big hit expectation]
FIG. 30 illustrates an execution mode of the notice effect and the degree of expectation of the big hit (special result). In the present embodiment, the notice production is a production that can give notice of the result of the special figure variation display game, and suggests the expectation degree (probability) of the big hit.

FIG. 30 is a table showing an example of the degree of expectation of a big hit for the execution mode of each notice effect.

The effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect and the second notice effect performed after the first notice effect as notice effects. The first notice effect is set to be executed, for example, in the first half variation which is the variation from the start of the variable display game (special figure variation display game, decorative special figure variation display game) to the reach state. It is a notice. Such a serif advance notice during the first half change is drawn in step B2006 of the above-described change effect setting process. The second notice production is, for example, a cut-in notice that is set to be executed in the latter half variation which is the variation from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The cut-in notice during the second half change is selected in step B2009 of the change effect setting process described above. Note that, for example, the form of presentation may be changed and a cut-in notice may be given as the first notice effect, or a dialogue notice may be given as the second notice effect. Further, the presentation modes of the first notice production and the second notice production are not limited to the cut-in notice and the dialogue notice, and various production forms such as character appearance production, group notice, button operation promotion production, and light emission of decorative members and the like. Can be applied.

At that time, the effect control device 300 can change the degree of expectation (reliability) at which the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit according to the execution mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. The expectation level of the notice effect indicates the probability of a big hit when the notice effect is selected, and the selection rate of the notice effect when it is a big hit and the notice effect when it is not a big hit (when it is off) Can be calculated based on the selection rate of In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation to the player in the notice production, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit, and to increase the interest of the game. The expectation level is, for example, a percentage (0
〜100%), the notice effect having an expectation of 100% can greatly enhance the player's expectation as a big hit confirmation effect. The expectation level may be set to a value other than percentage for each notice effect, and may be set as a relative value in each notice effect as described later.

The degree of expectation in the first notice effect (for example, the notice of dialogue) is 15% when the color of the balloon is green as the first identification mode, and 30% when the color of the balloon is red as the second identification mode. is there. It should be noted that, although not illustrated, the third and later identification modes for displaying a color with higher expectations may be set. In this way, the color of the balloon can be changed according to the degree of expectation, for example, from white with a low degree of expectation to blue, green, red, gold, or a rainbow (cherry tree) with a high degree of expectation.

Further, the degree of expectation in the second notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 30% in the first identification mode (for example, green) and 50% in the second identification mode (for example, red).

Therefore, for example, when the notice of the second identification mode (red) is continuously executed by the first notice effect and the second notice effect, 30% of the first notice effect (for example, the notice of words) and the second notice The effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 50%, which means that the expected degree of the second notice effect executed later is higher than that of the first notice effect executed first. Therefore, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit from the expectation level of the second notice effect by visually recognizing the notice effect (second notice effect) in the latter half of the high expectation level (high expectation priority). ). Note that when the second-half notice effect occurs, the expectation degree of the second-half notice effect may be prioritized and used over the expectation degree of the first-half notice effect (second-half notice effect priority). By giving priority to the second-half notice effect, it becomes easier to execute an effect with a high sense of premium in the first-half notice effect, regardless of whether or not the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit. The interest can be increased.

On the other hand, for example, in the case where the notice of the first identification mode (green) is continuously executed by the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, the notice of the dialogue) is 15%, and the second notice effect is the second notice effect. In the notice effect (for example, cut-in notice), the anticipation degree of the first notice effect executed earlier is higher than that of the second notice effect executed later by reversing to 5%. Therefore, the expectation level for the first-half notice effect (first notice effect) is higher than the expectation degree for the latter-half notice effect (second notice effect), and thus the player who has recognized that the expectation degree is high by the first-half notice effect. It is easy to increase the expectation of (high priority is given priority). Therefore, it is easy to increase the player's sense of expectation in both the first-half notice effect and the second-half notice effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

For example, when a rainbow-colored balloon, which is a big hit confirmation effect, is generated in the first notice effect, the color of the balloon in the second notice effect is changed to rainbow color or cherry blossom color to further fuel the player's expectation. May be. Further, by canceling (skipping) the second notice effect so that the stop result mode of the variable display game is immediately displayed, it may be possible for the player to recognize early that the big hit has occurred. ..

Further, the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be any mode in which the notice effect in the latter half (the second notice effect) is performed after the notice effect in the first half (the first notice effect). , May be applied to a series of notices (chance notices), step-up notices, and the like. For example, the effect control device 300 can execute the first notice effect using the hold indication as the look-ahead notice, and then execute the second notice effect when the hold related to the hold indication is exhausted. The pre-reading notice is pre-reading symbol type command processing (B1214) and pre-reading variable type command processing (B1
216). Further, the effect control device 300 may execute the second notice effect after the first notice effect after performing the first notice effect before the temporary stop or the like in the pseudo continuous variation. Production control device 300, the first step of the continuous notice or step-up notice (
After performing the first notice effect in the first stage and the first time), the second notice effect may be executed after the first notice effect.

In addition, as for the step-up notice, the single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of steps is set in a lower step (
It is an effect that is sequentially executed from a step) to a predetermined stage (a predetermined step). The continuous announcement (announcement of chance eyes) is an effect for displaying a decorative special symbol which is out of common mode over a plurality of variable display games. The pseudo continuous effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

[Specific example of identification mode of first notice effect]
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the identification mode of the first notice effect (serif notice), and is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 31A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red).

At the upper center of the screen of the display screen of the display device 41, a large decorative special pattern (large pattern, decorative first pattern
A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 61) in which the symbols A to C are enlarged and displayed.
0b, the middle area 610c) is arranged. The decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed in a variable display “↓↓↓”.

At the lower part of the display screen of the display device 41, a first hold display section 630a, a second hold display section 630b, and a hold exhaustion area 640 are arranged.

The first hold display unit 630a displays a hold display (start memory display, stock hold) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning memory). For example, in the first hold display section 630a of FIG. 31A, one hold display 633a relating to the variable display game before execution is displayed. When the next variable display game starts, the hold display 633a of the first hold display unit 630a is displayed.
At the display position of the hold display on the right side, that is, from the first hold display portion 630a to the hold exhaustion area 6
It moves to 40 and is displayed as a variable hold display (hold shift).

On the second hold display portion 630b, a hold display (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 start winning memory) is displayed. For example, the second hold display unit 63 at the current time (FIG. 31(A))
0b has no pending display corresponding to the second starting memory. It should be noted that the hold display displayed on the second hold display unit 630b is held and shifted prior to the hold display on the first hold display unit 630a when the next variable display game starts, and is moved to the hold exhaustion area 640. To do.

The pending display is displayed in the pending digest area 640. On the first hold display section 630a and the second hold display section 630b, a start memory display corresponding to the start memory relating to the variable display game before execution is displayed, while in the hold exhaustion area 640, a running memory is being executed. A start memory display (a changing hold display, a running hold display) corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game is displayed. For example, since the variable display game is being executed at the present time (FIG. 31A), the variable pending display corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

At the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 are arranged. The number "1" indicating the number of special map 1 reserved is displayed on the special map 1 reserved number display portion 650.
Is displayed, and the number "0" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed in the special figure 2 reservation number display portion 660.

When the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect, the dialogue notice 724 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, the dialogue notice 724 is a notice production made up of a character and a balloon in which the dialogue "Chance is!" of the character is displayed, and is executed during the first half change before the reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 31A, when the speech balloon 724 is green (first identification mode), the expectation in the first announcement effect is 15%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31B, when the speech balloon 724 has a red balloon (second identification mode), the expectation in the first trailer effect is 30%.

[Specific example of second notice production identification mode]
Subsequently, FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice), and is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 32(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. 32(B) is It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red). In addition, in the following screen transition diagrams, description of the same contents as those in FIG. 31 will be appropriately omitted.

When the effect control device 300 executes the second notice effect, the cut-in notice 725 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, the cut-in notice 725 is a notice production made up of a character, a balloon in which the line of the character "pre-emptive!!" is displayed, and a cut-in frame surrounding these characters, and during the second half change after the reach is established. To be executed. In the second half change, the decoration first symbols A to C in the change display area 610 are in the reach state “5↓5”, and the second notice effect (cut-in notice) is executed in association with the reach effect. Become.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the balloon of the cut-in notice 725 is green (first identification mode).
In the case of, the expectation degree in the second notice presentation is 5%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(B), when the balloon of the cut-in notice 725 is red (second identification mode), the degree of expectation in the second notice effect is 50%.

In addition, in the dialog advance notice and the cut-in advance notice shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation is not limited to the change of the color of the balloon, and the color of the character or the dialogue may be changed, and the sound or voice may be used. The notification may be changed. In addition, these shapes and patterns may be changed to indicate the degree of expectation. For example, the effect control device 300 may change the shape of the balloon to a cloud shape or a spark shape to indicate the degree of expectation. Further, when the character or the dialogue is changed as a mode that indicates the degree of expectation, a balloon having a color corresponding to the character or the dialogue may be displayed.

[Screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice production is executed]
33A and 33B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, and are examples of screen transitions when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

FIG. 33A(A) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the variable display game is executed. The decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed as a symbol “357”, and the pending shift-changed pending display is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

FIG. 33A(B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The decorative first patterns A to C are in the state of variable display “↓↓↓”.

FIG. 33A(C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect according to the second identification mode is executed while the variable display game is being executed. For example, when the first notice effect (serif notice) is executed in the first half change, the display screen of the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 33A(C).
As shown in, a speech notice 724 "Chance is!" with a red balloon (second identification mode) is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 30%.

FIG. 33A(D) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variation display game being executed is in the reach state in the second half variation, and FIGS. 33A(E) to 33B(H) show the reach state. It is a display screen when the reach effect is performed in. Variable display area 610
The decorative first designs A to C are in the reach state with the design “5↓5” as shown in FIG. 33A(D).

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 33A(E), a reach effect display 726 of "defeat enemy tiger!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen. Subsequently, the reach effect display 726 displayed in the center of the display screen is switched to a mode in which it battles with an enemy tiger, as shown in FIG. 33A(F) to FIG. 33B(H).

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) according to the second identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the balloon on the display screen of the display device 41 is red (second time) as shown in FIG. 33B(G). A cut-in notice 725 “identification mode” “preemptive!!” is displayed, suggesting that the expectation is 50%.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33B(H), a reach effect display 726 in which the own tiger (tiger on the player side) defeats the enemy tiger and wins by battle in the reach effect is displayed. Then, FIG. 33B(I
), the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol “555”, and the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes the jackpot result mode (special result mode),
Fanfare production and big hit game (special game) are started sequentially (not shown).

[Screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice production is executed]
33C and 33D are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series, and are other examples of screen transitions when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

33C(A) and FIG. 33C(B) are the same as FIG. 33A(A) and FIG. 33A(B) described above.
It is a figure similar to. As shown in FIGS. 33C(A) and 33C(B), the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 that are stopped and displayed with the symbol “357” are the variable display “↓”.
↓↓” has been set.

FIG. 33C(C′) shows the first according to the first identification mode when the variable display game is being executed.
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the notice production is executed. For example, when the first notice effect (serif notice) is executed in the first half variation pattern, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG.
As shown in 3C(C′), a dialogue notice 724 “Chance is!” with a green balloon (first identification mode) is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 15%.

FIGS. 33C(D) to 33C(F) are views similar to FIGS. 33A(D) to 33A(F) described above. The decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are in the reach state with the symbol “5↓5”, and the reach effect display 726 is switched to a mode in which the own tiger and the enemy tiger battle with each other by the reach effect.

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) according to the first identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the balloon on the display screen of the display device 41 is green (as shown in FIG. 33D (G′).
The cut-in notice 725 “first identification mode” is “preemption!!” suggesting that the degree of expectation is 5%. Therefore, the expectation level (15%) of the dialogue notice 724 (first notice effect) displayed first is higher than the expectation degree (5%) of the cut-in notice 725 (second notice effect) displayed later. Since it also becomes higher, it is possible to expect with respect to not only the second half notice effect (second notice effect) but also the first half notice effect (first notice effect). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to both of the notice effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

33D(H) and 33D(I) correspond to the above-described FIG. 33B(H) and FIG. 33B(I).
It is a figure similar to. As shown in FIGS. 33D(H) and 33D(I), the reach effect display 726 to win the battle is displayed, and the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are “55”.
By being stopped and displayed with the symbol "5", the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes the big hit result mode (special result mode). Then, the fanfare production and the big hit game (special game) are sequentially started (not shown).

[Modification of screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice production is executed]
FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, which is a modification of the screen transition when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game. In the modified example of the screen transition diagram, a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice) will be described. In this modification, both the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be performed during the second half change after the reach is established.

FIG. 34(G′) shows a case where the second notice effect (cut-in notice) and the first notice effect (serif notice) are executed during the reach effect after the reach state is obtained in FIG. 33A(F). Display device 4
1 is a display screen of No. 1.

After the second notice effect displays the cut-in notice 725 with a green balloon, "It's a preemption!!" and the expectation level is 5%, the cut-in notice 725 is followed by the first notice effect. A red speech notice 724 "Chance is!" with a red speech bubble is displayed overlaid, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 30%.

Then, after the battle production in which the enemy tiger attacks on a preemptive basis (not shown), FIG.
As shown in'), the reverse production in which the own tiger defeats the enemy tiger at the counter and wins is executed as the reach production display 726. As described above, when the expectation level of the first notice effect is higher than the expectation degree of the second notice effect, the first notice effect is overlapped and displayed immediately after the second notice effect, so that the player is interested. Since the range of the effect of the reach effect display 726 can be widened like holding, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the case of the modified example of this screen transition, the first notice effect in the first half change is skipped (the screen transitions from FIG. 33A(B) to FIG. 33A(D) by skipping FIG. 33A(C). ). The subsequent FIG. 34(I) is a diagram similar to FIG. 33A, in which the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed as the symbol “555”, and the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit. It becomes a result mode (special result mode).

[Modification of Table Diagram Explaining Expectation Level of Big Hit for Execution Mode of Each Notice Production]
FIG. 35 is a modification of the table diagram illustrating points related to the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the execution mode of each notice effect. The points here can be used as the above-mentioned effect points, but may not be used as the effect points.

As shown in FIG. 35, the points in the first notice effect (for example, the notice of words) of the modified example (
The value, the predetermined value) is 15p (points) in the case of the first identification mode (green), 30p in the case of the second identification mode (red), and 1p in the case of the third identification mode (black). is there. As described above, in the modification example of the table, in addition to the first identification mode and the second identification mode, for example, the third mode
As an identification mode, black with a low point (1p) is set as the color of the balloon. Note that the value of the points may be changed as appropriate, and the identification modes after the fourth identification mode and the notice effects after the third notice effect may be appropriately added.

Here, points are assigned to each notice effect such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect. The integrated value obtained by accumulating the points of the notice effect that is executed multiple times is the degree of expectation that will be a big hit (
The notice effect that is executed a plurality of times, such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect, and the point of the notice effect are set so as to change according to the reliability. Note that the point of the notice production may be set as a point having a negative value such that the integrated value decreases.

In addition, the expectation degree in the second notice production (for example, cut-in notice) of the modified example is 5p in the first identification mode (green), 50p in the second identification mode (red), and the third. It is 1p in the case of the identification mode (black). As described above, in any of the notice effects, when the third identification mode is selected, the degree of expectation becomes low (1p).

Therefore, for example, when the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect (15p) in the first identification mode (green) and then executes the second notice effect (50p) in the second identification mode (red). , The integrated value of points becomes 65p. In addition, for example, the first of the third identification mode (black)
When the notice effect (1p) and the second notice effect (1p) are executed, the accumulated value of points becomes 2p.

The notice effect that is executed by the effect control device 300 a plurality of times and the point of the notice effect are set such that the larger the integrated value of the points, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the first notice effect (30p) and the second notice effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red) are executed, the integrated value of points becomes 80p, which is the maximum in the combination in the table of FIG. Become. Therefore, the player can recognize that the expectation of the big hit is high, and the expectation can be increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Also, since the integrated value of the points of the notice effect that is executed a plurality of times changes according to the expectation of the big hit, it is possible to make the player's interest also in the notice effect of the first half (first notice effect). Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Timing chart when notice production is applied to pseudo continuous production]
FIG. 36 is an example of a timing chart when the notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous).

Here, the pseudo continuous effect means that the decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) that are variably displayed are simulated from the start to the end of one variation display game (special figure variation display game). This is an effect in which a pseudo change (single effect, sub effect, sub change) that temporarily displays a temporary stop (pseudo stop display) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, at the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is such that, during the period from the start to the end of one variation display game, the variation special display is not displayed as a temporary stop, and the pseudo variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times ( It may be an effect that makes it appear as if it is being executed multiple times. At this time, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as “NEXT” on the display screen of the display device 41 even if the temporary stop display is not performed, so that the effect of moving to the next pseudo variation is achieved. Can be executed.

For example, in the variable display game started in FIG. 36(A) or FIG. 36(B), a pseudo continuous effect including pseudo fluctuations is performed a predetermined number of times (three times). The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined in step B2010 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 29), for example.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 36(A), the effect control device 300 sets the pseudo continuous effects 1 and 2 to 1.
The first notice effect is executed during the pseudo change (single effect) for the first time, and the first notice effect is performed during the pseudo change for the third time.
3 Execute notice production. For example, the first notice effect is a dialogue notice, the second notice effect is a cut-in notice, and the third notice effect is an effect notice in which an effect effect is added around the balloon or the like. The pseudo variation execution time is set to the same time for the first and second pseudo variations, and the third pseudo variation is set to be longer than the first and second pseudo variations.

Here, in the first notice effect (serif notice) that is executed at the first and second pseudo changes of the pseudo continuous effect, the speech bubble that is the background of the dialogue is white (for example, expectation 1 %), and is set to blue (for example, the degree of expectation is 10%) in the second pseudo variation. Further, in the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the color is set to be blue or higher (for example, expectation level of 10% or higher).

At this time, the contents of the serif notice (serif, character emitting the serif, shape of the balloon, pattern, etc.) other than the mode (color of the balloon) suggesting the degree of expectation should be the same for the first to third pseudo variations. It is set and the first notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the advance notice effect of the same content as the pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, but the mode (color of the balloon) suggesting the expectation degree changes and the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased. Since it is possible to recognize that, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the second and third preliminary effects (cut-in preliminary announcement, effect preliminary announcement) are executed together with the first preliminary announcement effect (serif preliminary announcement in which the balloon is blue or more). After that, for example, the reach state (for example, “5↓5”) is achieved by the third pseudo variation, and the reach effect can be developed.

It should be noted that the effect control device 300, in the pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG.
The second pseudo-variation may be set to be longer than the second pseudo-variation, and the first preliminary notice effect and the second preliminary notice effect may be executed in the second pseudo-variation.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 36(B), the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect at the first pseudo change (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect and at the time of the second pseudo change. The first and second notice effects are executed, and the first to third notice effects are executed at the time of the third pseudo variation.

Here, in the first notice effect (serif notice) executed during the first to third pseudo changes of the pseudo continuous effect, the speech bubble that becomes the background of the dialogue is white (for example, the degree of expectation 1 in the first pseudo change). %), and in the second pseudo-variation, it is set to blue (for example, expectation 10%),
In the third pseudo variation, it is set to be blue or higher (for example, the degree of expectation is 10% or higher).

The first notice effect performed in the second and third pseudo changes is set to have the same content as the first notice effect performed in the first pseudo change, except for a mode suggesting the degree of expectation. In addition, the contents of the second notice effect performed in the third pseudo variation are set to be the same as those in the second notice effect performed in the second pseudo variation, except for the aspect suggesting the degree of expectation.

In this way, the effect control device 300 is also executed in the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 36(B) similarly to FIG. 36(A), after changing the mode in which the expectation degree of a big hit is suggested. The same effect as the notice effect in the pseudo variation is also executed in the notice effect in the pseudo variation executed later. Therefore, according to such a mode, the player performs an effect including the notice effect that has already been executed each time the pseudo-variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, and at the same time suggests the degree of expectation (color of the balloon). It can be recognized that the expectation of the jackpot is increasing due to the change of, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Even in a step-up notice that is a production in which a single production (sub-production) set in a plurality of stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step), a production including a previously-produced notice production is included. May be performed each time, and the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation may be changed. Pseudo continuous production and step-up notice consist of continuous multiple single productions,
The larger the plurality of times, the greater the expectation of a big hit.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game, a special figure variable display game), and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the game ( With the effect control device 300), a special game state (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). The effect control means performs a first notice effect (for example, a notice notice) and a second notice that is executed after the first notice effect, which gives a notice effect that indicates the degree of expectation (reliability) of the game stop result being a special result. A noticeable effect (for example, a cut-in notice) can be included, and a first identification mode (for example, a balloon is green), or a first noticeable effect execution mode and a second noticeable effect execution mode, or A second identification mode (for example, a balloon is red) having a higher degree of expectation than the first identification mode can be selected, and an expectation level in the case of executing the second notice effect in the second identification mode is the first notice. When the effect is set to be higher than the expectation when executing in the second identification mode, and when the second notice effect is executed in the first identification mode, the expectation degree is set when executing the first notice effect in the first identifying mode Set lower than the expectations.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to increase the player's expectation in both the first-half notice effect and the second-half notice effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a pseudo variable effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be the special result in one variable display game. Pseudo continuous production (performing pseudo variation, single production) a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (
Pseudo-variation that can be performed and that is executed first after different manners of suggesting the degree of expectation of a special result in at least two pseudo-variation effects that are performed a predetermined number of times. The same effect as the effect is also executed in the pseudo-variable effect that is executed later.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player performs an effect including the notice effect that has already been executed each time the pseudo-variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, and suggests the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon). ) Is changing and the expectation of a big hit is increasing, so it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) produces a special result in at least two pseudo variable effects that are successively performed among the pseudo variable effects that are performed a predetermined number of times. An effect having the same content as the pseudo-variation effect that is executed first after changing the mode that indicates the degree of expectation is also executed in the pseudo-variation effect that is executed immediately after. According to such a gaming machine 10, the mode (for example, the color of the balloon) that indicates the degree of expectation changes in the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo variable effect that is continuously performed, so the player recognizes the mode of the change. Becomes easier,
The interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs at least the first and second pseudo-variable effects (pseudo-variation, single effect) of the pseudo-variable effects performed a predetermined number of times. The effect having the same content as the pseudo variation effect executed for the first time after changing the mode in which the degree of expectation of the special result is suggested is executed for the pseudo variation effect executed for the second time. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the mode (for example, the color of the balloon) indicating the degree of expectation changes in the first and second pseudo changes of the pseudo change effect, and thus the change mode is similarly changed. Can be easily recognized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a predetermined value (
The notice effect (the first notice effect and the second notice effect) to which each point is assigned can be executed a plurality of times, and the integrated value obtained by accumulating the predetermined values of the notice effects executed a plurality of times is the result of the game stop. A notice effect that is executed a plurality of times is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation that is the special result.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the integrated value of the points of the notice effect executed a plurality of times changes according to the expectation of the big hit, the interest of the player is changed to the notice effect of the first half (first notice effect). You will be able to hold it even more, and you can enhance the interest of the game.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

[Timing chart when executing suggestive performance]
FIG. 37 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

First, in the suggestive effect according to the second embodiment, the timing of the first pattern effect will be described. When the effect display device 300 executes the first pattern effect while the variable display game is being executed, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Here, the suggestive effect is an effect that suggests that a predetermined notice effect may be executed. The suggestive effect (authenticity) in the first pattern effect functions as an authentic pattern effect in which a predetermined notice effect is subsequently performed. On the other hand, the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect, which will be described later, functions as a gasse pattern effect without a predetermined notice effect being performed thereafter. The effect control device 300 is not limited to the display screen of the display device 41, and may perform the suggestive effect by the light emitting effect of the decoration devices 18a and 18b. The suggestive effect (genuine) may be called the first suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect (gase) may be called the second suggestive effect.

Then, after the completion of the suggested effect (authenticity) in the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300.
Executes a notice effect that gives advance notice of predetermined contents as the notice effect (predetermined notice effect) according to the second embodiment. The notice effect is an effect that can give an advance notice of the result of the special figure variation display game, and may be an indication of the expectation (potential) of a big hit, but is not limited to this and gives an announcement that a particular effect is executed. You can do it.

Next, in the suggestion effect according to the second embodiment, the timing of the second pattern effect will be described. When the effect control device 300 executes the second pattern effect, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. As described above, the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect is a gaze pattern effect that is not followed by the notice effect.

The suggestive effect (authenticity) in the first pattern effect is the suggestive effect in the second pattern effect (
The execution time is set shorter than that of Gase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production time (the total production time of the suggestion production and the notice production) when the suggestion production (authenticity) in the first pattern production and the subsequent notice production are executed from being delayed. The interest of the game can be improved. Further, the suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect ends relatively early compared to the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect, and the player can more easily pay attention to the notice effect to be executed thereafter, so that the game The interest of can be improved. In addition, suggestive production (authenticity)
The start timing of starting the suggestive effect (gase) may be the same.

Further, the change time when the suggestive effect (authentic) of the first pattern effect and the notice effect are performed is
It becomes longer than the variation time when the suggestive effect (gase) of the second pattern effect is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to secure time for performing the notice production in the first pattern production having a relatively high expectation (reliability) of the big hit compared to the second pattern production, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the big hit by the notice production. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Timing chart when executing suggestive effect according to comparative example]
Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the timing of the suggestive effect according to the comparative example will be described. FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the comparative example executes suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the suggestive effect (authentic) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example functions as a genuine effect pattern in which the notice effect is subsequently performed, and the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example is , It functions as a gasse pattern production without any notice production thereafter.

Further, the suggestive effect (authentic) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example is set to the same execution time as the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example. Therefore, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect control device 300 executes the notice effect (authentic) having the same length as the suggestion effect (gase), and then executes the notice effect.

Therefore, compared to the first pattern effect of the second embodiment, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect time when the suggestive effect (authentic) and the subsequent notice effect are executed is extended. The interest of the game cannot be improved like the suggestive effect according to the second embodiment. Further, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the suggestive effect (authenticity) is delayed as described above, so that it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the notice effect to be executed thereafter.

[Timing chart when executing suggestive performance]
38A and 38B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 according to the second embodiment in time series, and are examples of screen transitions when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. ..

FIG. 38A(A) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The decorative first designs A to C in the variable display area 610 and the small decorative second pattern (small pattern, decorative special pattern) in the variable display area 615 are in a state of variable display “↓↓↓”.

One hold display 633a (start memory display, stock hold) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning prize memory) is displayed on the first hold display unit 630a, and a change in execution in the hold exhaustion area 640. A start memory display (a changing pending display, a digesting pending display) corresponding to the starting memory for the display game is displayed.

The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 displays a number "1" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 displays a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. There is.

In addition, a stage display 730 that displays the current stage (mode, situation of effect background) is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen of the display device 41. On the stage display 730, the characters “normal stage” indicating that the current stage is a normal stage are displayed.

FIG. 38A(B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game.

When the suggestive effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 38A(B), a suggestive effect display 731 is largely displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41. The suggestion effect display 731 is an effect display that gives a predetermined suggestion, and is an effect display that suggests the possibility of transition from the current stage to a different stage (for example, a “tiger zone” described later). The suggestion effect display 731 is shown in, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8A(B), the player can see the decorative first symbols A to C which are displayed semitransparently on the display screen and are changing together with the suggestion effect display 731. The suggestion effect display 731 is not limited to the semitransparent large display in the central portion of the display screen, and may be a small display or a predetermined character. The effect in the form of FIG. 38A(B) is commonly executed by the suggestive effect (authentic) and the suggestive effect (gase).
In the state of 1, the player is suggested that a transition to a different stage (that is, a predetermined notice effect) may be executed, but it is unknown whether the transition of this stage is actually executed.

38A(C) and FIG. 38B(D) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect functions as the true pattern effect in the first pattern effect. When the suggested effect is a true pattern effect, the stage display 7 is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the suggested effect display 731.
30 is enlarged and displayed. On the stage display 730, for example, “Torrent zone plunge!!”
Characters indicating that the current stage has transitioned to the "tiger zone" are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38B(D), in the stage display 730, characters “tiger zone” indicating that the current stage is “tiger zone” are displayed. Further, the effect control device 300 can change the background and the like of the display screen in response to the transition of the current stage, and the player who visually recognizes the change of the background and the like can enjoy the effect on the new stage. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. The transition of the stage to the "tiger zone" (including the display of characters such as "tiger zone entry!!" and "tiger zone") suggests the expectation of a big hit (for example, high expectation). It becomes a predetermined notice effect (so-called zone effect). On the "tiger zone" stage, a specific background image may be displayed as a background image on the display screen. Note that the predetermined notice effect is not limited to the zone effect, and may be another effect such as a dialogue notice effect or a character notice effect. After that, the variable display game has a stop result, so that the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbol are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38A(E), when the suggestive effect is a gasse pattern effect,
The effect control device 300 maintains the display state of the suggestion effect display 731 that is largely translucently displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41.

38A(E) and FIG. 38B(F) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect functions as a gasse pattern effect in the second pattern effect. Note that FIG. 38A(E)
In the above, the stage display 730 at the upper left part of the display screen is hidden, but it may be displayed. Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect display 731 displayed on the display screen is hidden as shown in FIG. 38B(F). It should be noted that the stage does not transit to the "tiger zone" as a predetermined notice effect, and thereafter, the variable display game has a stop result, so that the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol are stopped and displayed. ..

[First Modified Example and Second Modified Example of Timing Chart when Executing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 39 is a first modification example and a second modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 39(A), the timing of suggestive effect according to the first modified example of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the first modified example of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity) as the authentic pattern effect in which the notice effect is subsequently performed. After the end of the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity), the effect control device 300 executes the notice effect.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the first modified example, the effect control device 300 uses the first-half suggestion effect and the second-half suggestion effect (
Run).

Here, the effect control device 300, in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect according to the first modification, executes a common first half suggestive effect having the same content when viewed by the player.
The common first half suggestive effect may be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A(B). According to such an aspect, since the effect control device 300 can use common data when performing the first-half suggestion effect in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, the effect time of the first pattern effect is extended. It is possible to reduce the load and the processing load.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39(B), the timing of suggestive effect according to the second modified example of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the second modified example of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 sets the first pattern effect.
Similar to the first pattern effect according to the modified example, the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity) is executed, and the notice effect is executed after the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity) is finished.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the second modified example, the effect control device 300 uses the first-half suggestion effect and the second-half suggestion effect (as the gasse pattern effect without the notice effect being performed thereafter).
Run).

Here, the effect control device 300 executes a common suggestion effect having the same contents when the player visually recognizes the first half suggestion effect and the second half suggestion effect of the second pattern effect. According to such an aspect, since the effect control device 300 can use common data for the first half suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect when executing the second pattern effect, the data read immediately before is looped as it is. It can be used and the processing load can be further reduced. Further, in the authentic pattern effect of the first pattern effect, the notice effect is performed after the first half suggested effect (authenticity), so that the effect time of the first pattern effect is delayed as in the first modified example. it can.

Note that the first modified example of FIG. 39(A) and FIG. 39(B) are combined to execute the first half suggestive effect common to the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, and the first half of the second pattern effect. A common suggestive effect may be executed for the suggestive effect and the latter half suggestive effect. According to this aspect, the effect control device 300 uses common data for the first-half suggestive effect of the first pattern effect, the first-half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect, and the latter-half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect. Therefore, the processing load can be greatly reduced.

[Third Modified Example of Timing Chart When Performing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 40 is a third modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

In the third modified example, the effect control device 300, in the same manner as in the first modified example and the second modified example, in addition to executing the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, the second half suggested effect is performed by a plurality of suggested effects. It is possible to execute the third pattern effect divided into.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestive effect and then sequentially executes the latter-half suggestive effect by dividing it into the second-first suggestion (gase) and the second-second suggestion (reverse).

After the second half suggestive production, the first suggestion (gase) is a suggestive production that makes the player think that the subsequent notice production is not performed, and a second half suggestive production (gase) of the second pattern production.
A suggestive presentation that is common with some of

Further, the second suggestion (reverse) of the latter half suggestive effect is a reverse effect that is performed after the second suggestive effect (gase), and suggests that the notice effect is performed after the player makes the player think once about the gaze pattern effect. It is a kind of authentic pattern production.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the reverse effect of the second suggestion (reverse) after the first suggestion (reverse) of the second. Therefore, it is possible to give a positive surprise that the notice effect will be given to the player who thought that the notice effect will not be given due to the gasse pattern effect of the 1st suggestion (gase). Can be improved.

Note that the effect control device 300 divides the latter half suggestive effect of the third pattern effect into two (1st suggestion, 2nd suggestion), but it may be divided into three or more to perform the latter suggestion effect. ..

[Fourth Modification Example of Timing Chart when Executing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 41 is a fourth modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

In the fourth modified example, the effect control device 300 can execute the first to third pattern effects with different execution times of the suggested effect.

In the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can sequentially execute the notice effect and the reach effect, for example, after executing the first suggestion effect (first suggestion) as the genuine pattern effect, and the subsequent stop result of the variable display game. Can be a big hit (special result). At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the first suggestion effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the second suggestion effect.

Moreover, in the second pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can set the stop result of the variable display game to be out after the second suggestion effect (second suggestion) is executed as the goose pattern effect, for example. At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the second suggestive effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the third suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can sequentially execute the notice effect and the reach effect, for example, after executing the third suggestion effect (third suggestion) as the genuine pattern effect, and the subsequent variable display game. The stop result can be a big hit (special result). The third suggestive effect has a longer execution time than the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 of the fourth modified example plays the variable display game such that the change times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect in which the notice effect is executed are the same time. Further, the variation time of the second pattern effect in which the notice effect is not executed is set shorter than the variation time of the first and third pattern effects. Therefore, since the variation times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect are the same time, even if the execution time of the third suggestive effect in the third pattern effect is long, the overall variation time of the third pattern effect is long. It is possible to reduce the delay and improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, the variable display game can be ended earlier when the second pattern effect in which the gasse pattern effect is selected is selected, compared to the case in which the first pattern effect or the second pattern effect in which the genuine pattern effect is performed is selected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production in which the player's expectations are not increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Therefore, the execution time of the third suggestive effect (third suggestion), which is the true pattern effect of the third pattern effect, is longer than the execution time of the second suggestive effect (second suggestion), which is the gasse pattern effect of the second pattern effect. become longer. On the other hand, since the notice effect of the third pattern effect is shorter than the notice effect of the first pattern effect, the variation times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect are the same time.

Therefore, since the effect control device 300 performs the suggestive effect by making the execution time of the third suggestive effect, which is the genuine pattern effect, longer than the execution time of the second suggestive effect, which is the false pattern effect, compared to the normal variation mode. It is possible to further increase the player's expectation that the notice production having a high expectation of a big hit will be executed thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the effect control device 300 can execute the third pattern effect at the same time as the first pattern effect without delaying the entire variation time, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The start timings of the first to third suggestive effects are set to be the same, and are executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 41, but may be performed at the start of fluctuation. .. Reach productions are not limited to reach productions such as SP1 to 3 reach and premium reach, but may include pre-reading notices, pseudo continuous productions, continuous notices (announcements of chances), step-up notices, and counting of a predetermined number of seconds. A timer notice that gives a notice (countdown notice,
x seconds notice) etc. may be included.

Moreover, as described above, the effect control device 300 uses the first half suggestive effects in the first to third suggestive effects as a common aspect so that the processing load when executing the first to third suggestive effects is reduced. It is also possible to execute each suggestive effect.

[Fifth Modification Example of Timing Chart when Executing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 42 is a fifth modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

The suggestive effect executed by the effect control device 300 can also be applied to a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous) as shown in FIG. 42. The effect control device 300 uses one variation display game (
During the period from the start to the end of the special figure variation display game), the pseudo variation (single effect) in which the decoration special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) that are variably displayed are pseudo temporarily stopped (pseudo stop displayed) , Sub-effect, sub-variation) can be executed continuously for a predetermined number of times.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 42, the effect control device 300 executes the suggested effect (authenticity) as the true pattern effect at the first pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect. The effect control device 300 can, for example, suggest that the second and subsequent pseudo-variations succeed and continue with the suggestion effect (authenticity).

Then, in the notice effect executed after the suggestion effect (authenticity), the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a character (for example, "run") indicating that the pseudo variation succeeds and displays it on the decorative special pattern C and gives a notice. Can be performed. In the notice production, the production control device 300
Characters indicating that the pseudo-variation has succeeded and succeeded may be displayed on the decorative special symbols A and B, or the notice effect may be executed by displaying characters or figures other than "run".

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a suggested effect (gase) as a gasse pattern effect at the second pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect. Production control device 300, for example, 3
It is possible to suggest that the pseudo-variation after the first time succeeds and does not continue (ends in failure) with the suggestion production (gase). The suggestive effect (gase) may be divided into a first-half suggestive effect and a second-half suggestive effect, and a common suggestive effect may be repeated so that the processing load is reduced.

Then, the effect control device 300, during the suggested effect (gase) (for example, at the end of the suggested effect),
After suggesting that the pseudo variation ends (fails) without continuing, the variation display game can be stopped in an outlying manner.

In addition, the pseudo-variation performed a plurality of times (for example, the first and second times) performed by the effect control device 300 is as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the time is the same for the successful authentic pattern production and the unsuccessful gasse pattern production. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time when the pseudo-variation succeeds or fails, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game, a special figure variable display game), and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the game ( With the effect control device 300), a special game state (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). The production control means, as suggestive productions, a first suggestive production (a genuine pattern production, a suggestive production (genuine)) in which a predetermined notice production is executed after execution, and a second suggestive production in which the predetermined notice production is not executed after execution ( It is possible to select and execute at least one of the gasse pattern effect and the suggestive effect (gase), and the second suggestive effect selects the execution time of the suggestive effect when the first suggestive effect is selected. The execution time should be shorter than the above case.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the effect control means, the second suggestion effect (gase pattern effect,
The first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, suggestive effect (authentic)) is executed so that the execution time is shorter than that of the suggestive effect (gase). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time when the first suggestion effect and the subsequent notice effect are executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the first suggestive effect ends relatively early as compared with the second suggestive effect, and the player can easily pay attention to the notice effect to be executed thereafter, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the game time of the game when the second suggestive effect (gase pattern effect, suggestive effect (gase)) is selected (
The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, suggestive effect (authentic)) is selected is made longer than the change time. According to such a gaming machine 10, as compared to the second pattern effect including the second suggestive effect, the expectation level of the comparatively big hit including the first suggestive effect (
Since it is possible to secure the time for performing the notice effect in the first pattern effect having high reliability, the notice effect can increase the player's expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are effects having the same start timing and a common mode (first half suggestive effect). Performance control device 3
Since 00 can use common data when performing the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect,
It is possible to reduce the delay in the presentation time of the first suggestive presentation and to reduce the processing load.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, in which a predetermined notice effect is executed after execution as the suggestive effect).
At least one of the first suggestion), the third suggestive presentation (authentic pattern presentation, third suggestion) and the second suggestive presentation (gasse pattern production, second suggestion) in which a predetermined notice presentation is not executed after execution. , Can be selected and executed. Further, the effect control means makes the execution time of the suggestive effect when the first suggestive effect is selected shorter than the execution time when the second suggestive effect is selected, and the second suggestive effect is selected. In this case, the execution time of the suggestive effect is set shorter than the execution time when the third suggestive effect is selected.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the execution time of the third suggestion effect, which is a genuine pattern effect,
Since the suggestion effect is set for a longer time than the execution time of the second suggestion effect, which is a gasse pattern effect,
It is possible to further increase the player's expectation that the notice production with a high expectation of a big hit will be executed thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the effect control means can execute the third suggestion effect at the same time as the first suggestion effect without delaying the entire variation time,
The interest of the game can be improved.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) has a first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, than the game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the second suggestive effect (gase pattern effect, second suggestion) is selected. The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the first suggestion) or the third suggestion production (authentic pattern production, third suggestion) is selected is lengthened. According to such a gaming machine 10, as compared with the case where the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect which is the genuine pattern effect is selected, the case where the second suggestive effect which is the gas pattern effect is selected Because the game can be ended early,
It is possible to reduce the delay in the production in which the player's expectations are not increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300), the game time (variation time) of the game when the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, first suggestion) is selected, and the third suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, first). The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when (3 suggestions) is selected is set to the same length. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the game time of the game is the same when the first suggestive effect is selected and when the third suggestive effect is selected, the execution time of the third suggestive effect is long. Even if it becomes, it is possible to reduce the delay of the entire variation time and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The first suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect, and the third suggestive effect have the same start timing and have a common aspect. According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effect and reduce the processing load of suggestive effect.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 59. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first and second embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

[Basic configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a perspective view of the game board 30. FIG. 46 is an enlarged view of the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is characterized in that the rotating body unit 800 (winning stabilizing means, guiding means) described later is arranged in the gaming machine 10 of the first and second embodiments.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, a game area 32 is provided in an area surrounded by the guide rails 31, and a center case 40 is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 is attached behind the central window of the center case 40.

An upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) is provided on the upper part of the center case 40, a lamp display device 80 is provided on the left side, and a side effect unit 40d is provided on the right side.

A starting winning opening 36 (winning area) is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 32, and an ordinary variable winning device 37 (movable member 37b) (winning area) is provided on the right side and slightly higher position thereof, and further on the upper right. A universal figure starting gate 34 (winning area) is arranged in. Also, game area 3
In FIG. 2, the special variation winning device 39 (opening/closing door 39c) is arranged at a position above the universal figure starting gate 34.

In the first embodiment, a tube-shaped warp passage 40e (first intake passage) having an inflow port 40a that communicates with a position that is on the left side of the game area 32 and is substantially in the center in the height direction.
And a stage portion 40b that receives the rolled game ball from the warp passage 40e and causes the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 including the start winning opening 36.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the rotator unit 800 (
Guidance means) is provided. Further, the lower end of the warp passage 40e (guide means) is connected to the rotating body unit 800, and the game ball rolling in the warp passage 40e is supplied to the upper surface of the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810). The rotator unit 800 may be configured to be engaged with the stage portion 40b by a groove or the like, or may be integrally formed with the stage portion 40b. Further, the display device 41 is arranged behind the rotary unit 800.

In the vicinity of the inlet 40a on the left side of the game area 32, obstacle nails (not shown) are provided so that 80-90% of the game balls that flow to the left in the game area 32 (game balls left-handed) flow to the inlet 40a. ) Has been planted.

[Basic configuration of rotating unit]
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the rotating body unit 800 includes a rotating stage 810 on which a game ball rolls, and a tray portion 801 that surrounds the periphery of the rotating stage 810. The rotating stage 810 and the tray portion 801 are The game area 32 is inclined downward (for example, the inclination angle is about 5 degrees). As a result, the rotating body unit 800 can cause the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 including the start winning opening 36.

The tray portion 801 is a rolling surface 802 (bottom surface) and a rolling surface 80 in the shape of a rectangular plate on which the game balls roll.
It has wall parts 803A, 803B, 803C arranged at the outer edge of No. 2. The wall portion 803A is a member that rises from the edge of the rolling surface 802 on the display device 41 side and extends in the width direction (the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10), and the wall portion 803B rises from the left edge of the rolling surface 802. Is a member that extends in the depth direction (the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10), and the wall portion 803C is a member that rises from the right edge of the rolling surface 802 and extends in the depth direction.

One end of the tray portion 801 is arranged on the stage portion 40b with the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b exposed. An edge of the rolling surface 802 facing the game area 32 side is opened,
Further, as described above, since it is inclined downward toward the game area 32 side, the game ball supplied to the rolling surface 802 is the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b from the edge of the rolling surface 802 on the game area 32 side. It flows down toward the game area 32 via (stage part 40b1, stage part 40b2).

A part of the wall portion 803B facing the warp passage 40e is opened, and the lower end of the warp passage 40e is connected to the opened portion. Further, the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 is provided with a projection shape extending toward the rotary stage 810 from a position adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 40e, and a guide rib for guiding the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotary stage 810. 804
Are formed. The guide rib 804 is formed on the wall portion 803 more than the rotation axis of the rotation stage 810.
It is formed so as to guide the game ball from the position on the A side to the direction between the width direction of the tray portion 801 and the center direction (front-back direction) of the rotary stage 810. In addition, the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e is directly directed to the rotary stage 810 as described above so that the warp passage 40e is formed.
The guide rib 804 may be omitted in the case where is arranged.

The wall portion 803B and the wall portion 803C extend from the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. In addition, an extending portion 806 described later extends from the central portion of the edge. Therefore, the stage portion 40b is divided into the wall portion 803B on the left side and the extension portion 806.
b1 and the right side wall portion 803C and the stage portion 40b2 divided by the extending portion 806.

The rotary stage 810 is a rotary body that has a cylindrical shape and rotates around a cylindrical axis, and its upper surface is a rolling surface 811 on which a game ball rolls. Note that the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is also inclined downward toward the game area 32 as described above.

The rotary stage 810 is rotated by the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50), and the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50) is driven/stopped by the game control device 100 (FIG. 50) and the rotation speed (rotation direction). Control is performed). The rotary stage 8
Although 10 normally rotates counterclockwise, it may rotate clockwise (reverse rotation) as described later.

Notches 812 (holding portions) are formed on the periphery of the rotary stage 810 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, five notch portions 812 (any number) are formed, and the notch portions 812 are formed so that the upper surface and the side surface of the rotary stage 810 are open. Cutout 812
Is formed so that the game ball can be arranged inside in a plan view (top view), and the rotary stage 8
A game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of 10 can be inserted into the notch 812.

Here, the tray portion 801 includes the storage portion 8 including an inner wall that is formed along the side surface of the rotary stage 810.
05, and the rotary stage 810 is housed in the housing portion 805. Therefore, since the cutout portion 812 faces the inner wall of the storage portion 805, the portion of the cutout portion 812 that is open to the side surface side of the rotary stage 810 is closed by the inner wall of the storage portion 805. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the cutout portion 812 is held by the cutout portion 812 and the inner wall of the accommodation portion 805.

The depth of the cutout portion 812 is preferably deeper than the radius of the game ball and shallower than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Therefore, the rolling surface 8 of the rotary stage 810 is
It is possible to change the rolling direction of the game ball by rolling the game ball 11 and colliding with the game ball held in the cutout portion 812. Further, since the depth of the cutout portion 812 is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 so that the cutout portion 812 can be removed. It is possible to reduce the popping out.

By the way, the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 (so that the rotary stage 810 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801). You may arrange. At this time, the rotary stage 810 and the tray unit 80
Although a step is formed between 1, the step is preferably formed so as to be smaller than the radius of the game ball.

In this case, the game ball supplied from the warp passage 40e climbs over the step and the rotary stage 8
Although it moves to the rolling surface 811 of 10, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed irregularly when getting over. Further, some of the game balls may stay in front of the step without getting over the step, but when the cutout 812 comes to a position facing the game ball, the game is played in the cutout 812. The cutout portion 81 is the game ball that has accumulated on the condition that the ball is not held.
You can also get into 2.

An extension portion 806 extends from the center portion of the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 and right above the starting winning opening 36 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10. Further, the extension portion 806 and the tray portion 801 linearly penetrate from the tip of the extension portion 806 on the side of the starting winning opening 36 to the inner wall of the accommodation portion 805, and rotate with the open portion of the tip of the extension portion 806. A guide groove 807 that communicates with the side surface of the stage 810 is formed. The guide groove 807 sequentially faces the notch 812 as the rotary stage 810 rotates.

Here, the extending portion 806 forms the same plane as the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801,
It may be formed to be higher than the rolling surface 802 (so that the extending portion 806 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802). Further, the portion of the tray portion 801 adjacent to the guide groove 807 may be formed to be higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 similarly to the extending portion 806.

The bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is inclined downward toward the starting winning opening 36. The width of the guide groove 807 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. Then, the bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is
The notches 812 are arranged so as not to form a step that is convex when viewed from the bottom surface. On the other hand, the bottom surface of the cutout portion 812 is inclined downward toward the game area 32, similarly to the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801. Therefore, when the notch portion 812 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the notch portion 812 is introduced into the guide groove 807, and from the tip of the guide groove 807 (extension portion 806) to the start winning opening 36. It can be run down.

Further, a sluice valve 820 (first valve) is arranged at a position which becomes an entrance of the game ball of the guide groove 807. The sluice valve 820 can be driven in the height direction (the normal direction of the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801) by the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50), and the sluice valve 820 is guided by the guide groove 807.
The entrance is closed and the entrance is opened. The sluice valve 820 is urged by a urging means (spring or the like) in a direction of closing the guide groove 807, but when the valve solenoid 144 is driven, it is urged in a direction (downward direction) of pulling the sluice valve 820 out of the guide groove 807. The guide groove 807 is biased to open, and when the drive of the valve solenoid 144 is stopped, the gate valve 820 is biased by the biasing force of the biasing means in the direction (upward direction) into the guide groove 807 to close the guide groove 807. .. The valve solenoid 144 is controlled by the game control device 100, and is controlled to open the inlet at the timing when the cutout 812 faces the guide groove 807 (and in most cases where the timing occurs).

The distance between the main surface of the partition valve 820 on the game area 32 side and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side is preferably shorter than the radius of the game ball. Accordingly, when the partition valve 820 is closed, the game ball rolling in the direction of entering the guide groove 807 from the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 abuts on the partition valve 820 and bounces back, and the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b.
Since it flows down to 2, it is possible to restrict the game ball from entering the guide groove 807.

Further, when the gate valve 820 is closed, the height of the gate valve 820 is set to the rotary stage 810.
It is preferable that they are arranged so as to be higher than the rolling surface 811 of the above (the gate valve 820 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810). Accordingly, when the cutout portion 812 is arranged not to face the guide groove 807, the partition valve 820 shuts off the game ball rolling in the direction directly from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 to the guide groove 807. Since the rolling direction is changed by the lever, the game ball not held in the cutout portion 812 is the guide groove 8
It is possible to restrict direct access to 07.

When the game ball is constantly supplied to the rotary stage 810, the game ball is held in all of the cutouts 812 of the rotary stage 810, and the rotary stage 810 is rotating at a constant rotation speed, the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807). Since most of the game balls flowing from) enter the starting winning opening 36, the winning frequency is almost constant. Therefore, in the case where only the game balls that enter the starting winning opening 36 flow down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807), the start value S of the gaming machine 10 depends on the rotation speed of the rotating stage 810, but is constant. Becomes In the present embodiment,
The start value S is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) in the normal game state (when left-handed), that is, the number per predetermined period when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36. is there.

By the way, in the rotating body unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the extending part 806 (the guiding groove 807), the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b1, and the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b2 include the start winning opening 36. It flows down toward the game area 32.

Here, the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) (and the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b).
The distance between 2) and the starting winning opening 36 in the height direction is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Also,
The central portions of the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2 have a concave shape that is inclined toward the game area 32 side.

Therefore, for example, when the game ball flows down from the stage part 40b1 and the stage part 40b2 in a manner of rolling from the outer side in the left-right direction of the concave shape toward the center (the extension part 806 side), the game ball is moved to the start winning opening 36. It is more likely to run down. Therefore, most of the game balls that have flowed down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) enter the starting winning opening 36, but the game balls collide with the game balls that flow down from the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b2, and start winning is achieved. The winning of the prize in the mouth 36 may be hindered.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down from the stage unit 40b1 or the stage unit 40b2 is an extension unit 806.
There is also a case where the starting winning opening 36 is won without colliding with the game ball flowing down from the (guidance groove 807).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, dowels (not shown) are planted in a row in the direction toward the starting winning opening 36 from the position below the windmill in the game area 32 as a base point. There is a case in which the game ball that has flowed in following the above-mentioned wins in the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from the rotating body unit 800 collides with the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (such as road nails) without passing through the rotating body unit 800, and the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is hindered. In some cases.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the dojo may jump and get on the rotary stage 810 or the tray unit 801.

As described above, the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) and the stage portion 40.
The game ball flowing down from b1, the game ball flowing down from the stage section 40b2, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 without passing through the rotary unit 800 interfere (collide) with each other in the vicinity of the start winning port 36. As a result, there will be some variation in the frequency of winning of the game balls into the starting winning opening 36, that is, the start value S. Of course, the extension portion 806 (guide groove 807)
It is also possible that all of the game balls that have flowed from the player win the starting winning opening 36. In this case, for example, obstacle nails are appropriately arranged on both sides in the width direction of the route from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) to the starting winning opening 36, and the game flows from other than the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807). It suffices that the ball does not collide with the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the start value S can be stabilized, but it is difficult to predict the rolling of the game ball in the rotary unit 800 and the destination of the game ball that has flowed down from the rotary unit 800. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the rolling and downflow of the game balls, which can enhance the interest.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body unit 800 is described on the premise that the game ball flows down toward the starting winning opening 36, but other winning areas, for example, the universal figure starting gate 34.
The game ball may be made to flow down to any of the general winning opening 35, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device 39.

[Behavior of the game ball in the rotating unit]
FIG. 47 is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800, and is a diagram (part 1) showing a state of the game balls in the rotating body unit 800. FIG. 48 is a plan view of the rotator unit 800 (a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44 ), and is a diagram (part 2) showing the state of the game balls in the rotator unit 800. FIG. 49 is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800, and is a diagram (part 3) showing the state of the game balls in the rotating body unit 800.

The behavior of the game ball supplied to the rotating body unit 800 will be examined. As shown in FIG. 47, the game ball is held in at least one of the five cutouts 812, and the guide groove 807 does not face the cutout 812, and the inlet of the guide groove 807 is partitioned off. When 820 is closed, the game ball is rotated from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) to the rotary stage 8
Consider the case where it flows down to 10.

In this case, since the rolling direction changes irregularly when the game ball rides on the rotary stage 810 as described above, the game ball directly contacts the empty cutout portion 812 as indicated by [1] in FIG. 47. When entering, or as shown in [2] in FIG. 47, the game ball passes between empty notches 812, flows down from the rotary stage 810, and collides with the wall 803C of the tray 801. A behavior of flowing down to the stage portion 40b2 and flowing down to the game area 32 can be considered.

Also, as shown in [3] in FIG. 47, when the game ball rolls on the rotary stage 810 in the same manner as [1], but the game ball is already held in the cutout portion 812 at the tip of the game ball. ,
The rolling game ball collides with the held game ball to change the rolling direction and another notch 81
A behavior that goes into 2 may be considered. In any case, although the game ball flowing down to the rotary stage 810 finally flows down toward the game area 32, the notch 81
By colliding with the game ball or the wall portions 803A, 803B, and 803C held by 2, the rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801 can roll in any direction.

Further, as shown by [4] in FIG. 47, there is a game ball rolling on the tray portion 801 (rolling surface 802) toward the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807). In this case, the game ball is
When it exceeds the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32, the tray portion 801 begins to fall so as to intersect the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801, and then collides with the side surface of the extending portion 806 to cause the game ball Most will fall to the stage part 40b1. The stage unit 40b1
The game ball that has dropped onto the (stage part 40b2) drops toward the game area 32 (or the starting winning opening 36).

Further, there may be a game ball rolling in a direction to reach the guide groove 807 before intersecting the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. However, by designing the gap between the main surface of the partition valve 820 on the side of the game area 32 and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 to be smaller than the radius of the game ball, the game ball will become the partition valve 820. Most of the game balls collide and flow down to the stage section 40b1 and the stage section 40b2.

Furthermore, although there is a game ball rolling from the rotary stage 810 toward the guide groove 807,
When the height of the partition valve 820 is higher than the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810, most of the game balls collide with the partition valve 820 and are prevented from entering the guide groove 807.

As described above, when the gate valve 820 closes the inlet of the guide groove 807, the guide groove 80
It is configured so that game balls hardly enter 7.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball is held in at least one of the five cutouts 812, and the sluice valve 820 is arranged at a timing when the guide groove 807 faces the cutout 812 holding the game ball. Consider a case where the game ball flows down from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) to the rotary stage 810 while the entrance of the guide groove 807 is open.

By opening the sluice valve 820 at the timing when the cutout portion 812 holding the game ball facing the guide groove 807 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 is guided to the guide groove 807. It can be made to flow toward the starting winning opening 36 via.

For example, when the cycle of one rotation of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds, the sluice valve 820 opens every 8 seconds, and the sluice valve 820 opens at the timing when the cutout portion 812 faces the guide groove 807. , The guide groove 8 for the game ball held in the notch 812 every 8 seconds
It is possible to flow down to 07. At this time, in the case where the game balls are held in all the cutouts 512, after the first game balls flow down toward the starting winning port 36, all the remaining game balls face toward the starting winning port 36. It takes 32 seconds to flow down. The cutout 81
It takes a predetermined time for the game ball 2 to flow down to the guide groove 807 after receiving the game ball from the warp passage 40e. Considering a case where the game ball directly enters from the guide rib 804 into the cutout portion 812 [2] at the time of the arrangement shown in FIG. 48, the predetermined time is 16 seconds when the rotary stage 810 is counterclockwise (in the case of a one-lap delay, 56 seconds) and 24 seconds in the case of clockwise rotation (64 seconds in the case of a delay of one round). Here, if the winning to the starting winning opening 36 from other than the guide groove 807 is negligible, the start value S in this case is 7.5 times/minute. Also, the start value S
In order to set 7.5 times/minute, one or more per 8 seconds, that is, 7.5 or more (more than the number corresponding to the start value S) game balls per minute from the warp passage 40e to the rotary stage 810. To supply.

Further, for example, consider a case where the sluice valve 820 opens every 3 seconds, and the sluice valve 820 opens at a timing at which one of the cutouts 812 faces the guide groove 807 in the initial state. In the initial state, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812[1] is the guide groove 807.
It becomes possible to flow down to. After that, [opening cycle of the gate valve 820 (3 seconds)] and [notch 81
No. 812 [2] for each product (24 seconds) of the facing period (8 seconds) of the second guide groove 807].
, The cutout portion 812[3], the cutout portion 812[4], and the game ball held in the cutout portion 812[5] can almost flow into the guide groove 807 in this order. At this time, in the case where the game balls are held in all the cutouts 512, after the first game balls flow down toward the starting winning port 36, all the remaining game balls face toward the starting winning port 36. It takes 96 seconds to flow down. In this case, since winnings per minute from the guide groove 807 to the starting winning opening 36 are small, in order to increase the start value S, the starting winning opening 3 other than the guiding groove 807 is used.
Increase the number of winnings in 6.

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed down to the rotary stage 810 has an empty cutout 81 as shown in [6].
When entering 2, the game ball (or the wall portions 803A, 803B, 803C) held in the cutout portion 812 collides with the game ball as shown in [7] to change the rolling direction and the stage portion 40b1 (or the stage portion 40b2). ).

As shown in FIG. 49, when the sluice valve 820 opens the inlet of the guide groove 807 at the timing when the guide groove 807 faces the cutout portion 812 that does not hold the game ball, the warp passage 4
Consider the case where the game ball flows down from 0e (guide rib 804) to the rotary stage 810.

In this case, as for the game ball rolling on the tray portion 801, as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball that has once come out of the rotary stage 810 collides with the wall portion 803C and returns to the rotary stage 810 again to guide grooves. In some cases, it may enter into the guide groove 807 or enter into the guide groove 807 by entering into the notch portion 812 facing this. In this way, there is a possibility that the game ball once ejected from the rotary stage 810 can be re-challenged for the winning of the starting winning port 36.
In particular, the smaller the number of game balls held in the cutout portion 812, the higher the possibility of winning in the starting winning opening 36 by re-challenge. In addition, as described above, the possibility of entering the guide groove 807 without passing through the cutout portion 812 and winning the start winning opening 36, and the stage portion 40b1.
Since there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down 40b2 will win the starting winning opening 36, even if the game ball is held in all the cutout portions 812, the value of the above re-challenge is not lost.

Further, as described above, considering the case where the sluice valve 820 is opened every 8 seconds and the case where it is opened every 3 seconds, the frequency of opening is higher when opening every 3 seconds. It is highly possible that the guide groove 807 enters the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch portion 812 facing the 807.
However, by shortening the opening time of the gate valve 820 (for example, 0.3 seconds), it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of these.

The rotary stage 810 rotates counterclockwise, for example, at a constant rotation speed, but it can be controlled so as to reversely rotate for a short time at a predetermined timing. Thereby, for example, when a game ball is accumulated between the guide rib 804 and the rotary stage 810, it can be taken out. In addition, the rotation stage 810 may be reversely rotated at a minute rotation angle and then rotated in the forward direction when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807 and then slightly rotates. As a result, even when the game ball is caught between the cutout portion 812 and the tray portion 801, this can be eliminated. Of course, when the cutout 812 faces the guide groove 807, control is performed to stop the rotation of the rotary stage 810 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so that the game ball can surely flow into the guide groove 807. Good.

45 to 49, the notches 812 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotary stage 810, but they may be arranged nonuniformly. in this case,
For example, an encoder (not shown) is attached to the rotary stage 810, and the sluice valve 820 is opened each time the encoder (not shown) detects a predetermined rotation angle when any of the cutouts 812 faces the guide groove 807. It may be configured to operate.

In the present embodiment, a configuration that does not use the gate valve 820 is also suitable. For example, a fixed stage (not shown) having substantially the same size in the surface direction is arranged below the rotation stage 810, and a plurality of first through holes (having a larger diameter than the game ball diameter) are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the rotation stage 810. And a second through hole is formed at a position facing any of the first through holes of the fixed stage. A second tray portion (not shown, similar to the tray portion 801) is formed under the fixed stage (tray portion 801), and the second tray portion has a second extending portion (not shown, extending portion 80).
6) is provided, and the game ball can flow down from the tip of the second extending portion toward the starting winning opening 36. Then, when the game ball flows down to the rotary stage 810, the game ball enters and is held in the first through hole, and when any of the first through holes communicates with the second through hole, the game ball is held in the first through hole. The game ball can flow down toward the starting winning opening 36 through the second through hole, the second tray portion, and the second extending portion. In this case, the cycle in which the game ball can flow from the second extending portion toward the starting winning opening 36 is a value obtained by dividing the [cycle of the rotary stage 810] by the [number of first through holes].

Alternatively, instead of the fixed stage, a movable stage (not shown) that has substantially the same dimensions in the surface direction as the rotating stage 810 and moves in the axial direction is arranged below the rotating stage 810, and after a predetermined time elapses, the movable stage is a game ball. The game balls held in the first through holes are all supplied to the second tray portion by being separated from the rotary stage 810 by a distance longer than the diameter of the movable stage, and the movable stage is returned to the original position and is in the second tray portion. You may make it flow down all the game balls toward the starting winning opening 36.

In the present invention, the guiding means is premised on the rotating body unit 800, but as another configuration, it is arranged immediately below the first stage (not shown) that receives the game ball that has flowed down the warp passage 40e. Second stage (not shown, arranged at the same position as the tray unit 801)
Those provided with and are also applicable.

The first stage is formed of, for example, a transparent member (not necessarily transparent), and is provided with a drop mechanism in the center thereof for dropping the game ball toward the second stage and changing the drop timing irregularly. ing. The dropping mechanism has an obtuse-angled taper inner wall (a slanting angle is gentle) whose diameter becomes smaller toward the bottom so that the game ball can roll, and the lower end has a first through hole through which the game ball can pass. , Are provided.

The second stage is provided with a plurality of branch paths that radially branch around a position directly below the drop mechanism, and one of the branch paths is arranged so that a game ball can be almost won in the starting winning opening, The remaining branch route allows the game ball to flow toward the game area 32 (rarely toward the starting winning opening 36).

At a branch position (a position directly below the drop mechanism) of the branch path, a movable part (which can perform a rotational motion or a swing motion) is arranged. The movable portion has, for example, a conical shape with a gentle inclination having a direction along the normal of the second stage as a rotation axis and having the rotation axis as an apex, and having a radial uneven shape centered on the apex, A plurality of recesses formed by the uneven shape serves as a guide for temporarily holding the game ball and guiding it to the branch path.

Since the game ball that has flowed down from the warp passage 40e to the first stage can enter the dropping mechanism from any direction, the number of rounds (or the number of rounds and rounds) around the inner wall of the dropping mechanism is different, so The route to reach changes irregularly for each game ball. Therefore, the fall timing of the game ball that has flowed down to the drop mechanism changes irregularly.

Since the game ball dropped from the first through hole falls near the apex of the movable part, it becomes irregular in which direction it rolls from the apex of the movable part, and the guided direction is also the timing of the game ball falling or It changes depending on the rotation direction, the rotation speed of the movable part, the phase (direction of the recess), and the like. Therefore, the branch path along which the game ball flows down also changes irregularly for each game ball.

However, since the number of branch paths is finite, the number of downflow paths for the game balls is smaller than the number of downflow paths for the game balls that flow down only in the game area in which the wind turbines and obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the frequency (probability density) that a fixed number of game balls can be won in the starting winning port 36 within a predetermined time is higher than that of the conventional gaming machine, and the start value S is also stable.

In addition, it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball falls from the drop mechanism, and how the game ball can be distributed to the branch route by the movable part and win the start winning hole, thereby making the player interested in the movement of the game ball. This can enhance the interest of the game.

As another configuration, the guide groove 807 may be provided below the second stage (without the branch channel). At this time, at least one of the recesses forming the uneven shape of the movable portion is a slit (notch) through which the game ball can penetrate. Further, a second through hole through which the game ball can penetrate is formed at a position directly below the movable portion of the second stage, and when the slit and the second through hole have a predetermined angle, the slit and the second through hole are in communication with each other. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second through hole flows down to the guide groove 807.

Then, when the game ball dropped from the drop mechanism flows down into the slit at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other, the game ball that flows down into the slit flows down into the guide groove 807 through the second through hole and starts winning. Run down toward mouth 36. The game ball that did not flow down to the second through hole in the second stage is the second stage (stage part 40b1 or stage part 40b2).
You may make it flow down toward the game area|region 32 (rare start winning opening 36 rarely).

Here, the slit and the second through hole may be formed so as to have a width and a diameter larger than that of the recessed portion forming the uneven shape of the movable portion.

Further, the warp passage 40e is branched by using a distribution device 850 or the like described later, one is allocated toward the first stage by the warp passage 40e and made to flow down, and the other is made to flow down to a branch flow passage toward the second through hole. You can The movable part is arranged between the lower end of the branch passage and the second through hole, but when the game ball flows down from the branch flow path at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate, the game ball is It may flow down to the second through hole, and at other timings, it may flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely the starting winning opening 36) via the second stage (stage 40b1 or stage 40b2).

Further, instead of the rotating body unit 800, a swing member having a groove in which the game ball can roll may be used. The oscillating member oscillates (vibrates, swings) around a vertical axis in a predetermined cycle, and one end of the groove faces the lower end of the warp passage 40e (or the guide rib 804) every half cycle. It swings (vibrates) so that the other end of the groove faces the guide groove 807. The partition valve 820 may not be provided. If the groove and the guide groove 807 have a certain width, even with such a configuration, the game ball can be regularly won (every half of the above-described cycle) into the starting winning opening 36, and the start value S Can be stabilized.

[Control system]
50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the game control device 100 can control the driving/stopping of the rotary stage motor 143 that rotates the rotary stage 810 and the valve solenoid 144 that drives the partition valve 820. That is, the game microcomputer 111 that constitutes the game control device 100 has the rotary stage 810 via the data bus 140, the output port 141, and the fifth driver 138e.
A control signal relating to the rotation speed (including the rotation in the reverse direction) of can be transmitted to the rotary stage motor 143. Similarly, the gaming microcomputer 111 can send a timing signal to the valve solenoid 144 of the partition valve 820 at the timing of opening the partition valve 820.
The control signal is a signal that rotates the rotary stage 810 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 40 seconds described above). The timing signal is output by the sluice valve 82 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 8 seconds or 3 seconds described above).
This signal drives 0.

In the game control device 100, a first proximity switch 72a, a second proximity switch 72b (third detection means), and a third proximity switch 72c (first switch) which will be described later, via the proximity I/F 121 and the input ports 124 and 126. Detection means) and the detection signal transmitted from the fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means), respectively. In addition, the game control device 100 can respectively transmit a drive signal to a valve solenoid 144, a valve solenoid 145, and a valve solenoid 146 described later via the output port 141 and the fifth driver 138e.

The game control device 100, for example, when a touch switch signal is input from the operation handle 24 (or when the driving of the ball launching device is detected), a control signal and timing for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction (counterclockwise). The transmission of signals can be started.

Further, the game control device 100, instead of the touch switch signal, the winning opening switch 35a
When the customer waiting state of the game machine 10 is canceled by inputting a signal for detecting a game ball such as the start opening 1 switch 36a, the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction are transmitted. You can start.

Then, the game control device 100 stops the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal during a right hitting state such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state (excluding latent probability variation) (may be a left hitting state), When the right-handed state (or left-handed state) is completed, the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction can be restarted. This avoids the power consumption of the rotary stage 810 during right-handing, and the number of holdings (
It is possible to prevent the game ball held on the rotary stage 810 from unnecessarily entering the starting winning port 36 when the starting memory number is maximum.

Further, the game control device 100, for example, when a latent probability change (other specific game state may be other than this) occurs, after that, a predetermined time (the latent probability change continues even after the predetermined time has elapsed).
, Or the control signal is stopped (or a control signal for rotating in the opposite direction (clockwise) is transmitted) until the latent probability change is completed, and the transmission of the timing signal is stopped (the gate valve 820 opens the inlet of the guide groove 807). The closed state may be continued), and then the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the latent probability change has occurred.

Then, in the state in which the probability of latent change changes as described above and the rotating stage 810 is rotating, for example, when the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37 detects a game ball, control for rotating the rotating stage 810. The signal may be stopped. When the latent probability variation occurs, the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted from the beginning so that the rotary stage 810 does not suggest the latent probability variation.

Further, the game control device 100 can end the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal when the customer wait state (FIG. 10, step A3212) is entered. As a result, the power consumption while waiting for customers can be reduced. Of course, even during waiting for customers, it is possible to transmit control signals and timing signals as in the case of playing a game.

The RAM 111c forming the gaming microcomputer 111 stores information on the rotational speed and timing information associated with the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 as described above. Therefore,
The gaming microcomputer 111 can appropriately select the information on the rotational speed and the timing information based on the state of the gaming machine 10 and transmit the control signal and the timing signal.

In addition, the game microcomputer 111 can transmit the control signal and the timing signal in association with the production control command transmitted to the production control device 300, and rotates the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction or the reverse direction depending on the production content. You can also

As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure game process of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the movable body control process (step A2619) is executed after the symbol variation control process. In the movable body control process (step A2619), the game control device 100 determines the state of the gaming machine 10 (waiting for a customer, playing a game, right hitting state, etc.), and based on the state, sends a control signal and a timing signal. Send.

The state of the game machine 10 can be identified by various commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the rotary stage motor 1
It is also possible for the production control device 300 to control 43 and the valve solenoid 144. The production control device 300 sets the rotary stage motor 143 and the valve solenoid 144 to the board production device 44.
Can be controlled as That is, the effect control device 300 can transmit the control signal and the timing signal based on various commands transmitted from the game control device 100. As a result, the game control device 100 does not transmit the control signal and the timing signal, so that the processing load of the game control device 100 can be reduced accordingly.

By the way, the game control device 100 (and the effect control device 300) starts the variable display game on the display device 41 when the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44, 45, and 46, the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810) is visible to the player. Therefore, the player may pay attention to the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rotation stage 810 and the tray portion 801, and may not pay attention to the variable display game.

Therefore, it is preferable to set the duration (that is, the variation time) of the special figure variation display game to be substantially the same as the period in which it flows down from the rotary stage 810 (the guiding groove 807) toward the starting winning opening 36. As a result, the state in which the game ball starts to flow down from the rotary stage 810 with the end of the variable display game is repeated, so that the display device 41 and the rotary unit for displaying the special figure variable display game can be alternately focused and rotated. You can avoid a situation where you are only gazing at the unit.

For example, when the cycle of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval at which the gate valve 820 is opened is 8 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the cutout portion 812 toward the starting winning opening 36 is 8 seconds. Since it is second, it is preferable that the variable display game starts with the winning of the game ball and the duration thereof is about 8 seconds. Further, assuming that the cycle of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval at which the gate valve 820 is opened is 3 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the cutout portion 812 toward the starting winning opening 36 is 24. Since it is second, it is preferable that the variable display game starts with the winning of the game ball and the duration thereof is about 24 seconds.

In addition to the above, the duration (variation time) of the special figure variation display game may be longer or shorter than the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the cutout portion 812 toward the starting winning opening 36, It may be longer than the cycle of the rotary stage 810. The duration of the variable display game may be the same as the product of the [predetermined coefficient] and the [cycle of the rotary stage 810], or may be longer or shorter than that. Here, the [predetermined coefficient] is "N"=4 when the timer interrupt period Nms of the CPU 11a (FIG. 50) is 4 ms=4 ms, or the opening time Mms=100 ms when the special variation winning device 39 is a small hit. If, then “M”=100 can be used.

Further, a first proximity switch 72a (FIG. 45, FIG. 50) for detecting the game ball is attached at any position of the warp passage 40e, and when the game ball passes through the first proximity switch 72a, the display device 41 displays, The count number of the game balls that have passed through the first proximity switch 72a is displayed, and when the count number exceeds the set count value, the count value becomes zero and the state becomes countable again, and the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 thereafter. In the pending change notice effect (may be applied continuously for one piece or a plurality of pieces) using the hold display generated by winning, the notice effect having higher expectation (reliability) than usual may be performed. Alternatively, when the count number exceeds the set count value, the variation time of the variable display game related to suspension (starting memory) is lengthened,
It is possible to cause a player to expect the player to pay attention to the display device 41 by causing the player to expect the effect (here, the zone effect) in which the special figure variation display game (the variation) currently being executed is a big hit.

The zone effect is, for example, performed by the entire display device 41, and is an effect in which the background color is different from the normal color (for example, blue) (for example, red), and is expected to be a big hit compared to the normal case. Set it to a high degree. In addition, when the count number exceeds the set count value, the zone effect may be executed by changing the effect already set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 29, B2006) (between B0014 and B0017 of the main process). Such processing steps may be provided).

It should be noted that the zone effect may be executed as the prefetch zone effect when the count exceeds the set count value and a hold with a high expectation of a big hit occurs thereafter, instead of the zone effect for the variation. The prefetch zone effect is the prefetch symbol type command processing (
B1214) and the prefetching variable system command processing (B1216). In addition, although a hold with a high degree of expectation has already occurred, a configuration in which the hold change notice effect related to the hold is not performed (a hold change notice effect with a high expectation degree) is also possible. In this case, the count number is set to the set count. When the value exceeds the value, the look-ahead zone effect related to the hold may be immediately executed, and at that time, the hold change notice effect related to the hold may be executed (may not be executed). The zone effect can be ended when the hold is exhausted.

The first proximity switch 72a may detect the game ball when the game ball passes through the first proximity switch 72a, for example, like the specific area switch 72, and the second proximity switch 72b, the third proximity switch 72c, and the fourth proximity switch 72c, which will be described later. The same applies to the proximity switch 72d.

In addition, as for the pending change notice effect, the effect control device 300 performs the prefetch symbol type command processing (B1
214) and the look-ahead variable system command processing (B1216), which is a notice effect for changing the hold display corresponding to the starting memory from a normal color (white) to a different color (for example, blue, green, red). ..

The effect control can be performed by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 (see later). By performing such an effect, both the display device 41 displaying the variable display game and the rotating body unit 800 can be watched, and a state in which only the rotating body unit 800 is watched can be avoided. A signal from the first proximity switch 72a or the like may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such an effect without going through the game control device 100.

On the other hand, when the game state of the gaming machine 10 is the normal game state and the game balls are held in all the cutouts 812 of the rotary stage 810, the player stops the game (the state in which the game balls are not shot). It is possible to do it. On the other hand, as described above, all the game balls introduced into the game area 32 do not flow down to the rotating body unit 800, but do not pass through the lower left area of the game area 32, that is, the rotating body unit 800 (partly The rotary stage 81 jumps up from the area.
(There is also a case where the player gets 0), and it flows down to the area where the starting winning opening 36 can be won.

Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is located at a specific position in the lower left area of the game area 32, the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41 may be used to perform an effect of promoting the continuation of the game ball. It is suitable.

For example, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (winning area), or the second proximity switch 72b (third detection) which is arranged at any position on the left side of the game area 32 and lower than the inflow opening 40a. Means, FIG. 44, FIG. 50) detects a game ball, the upper performance unit 40
In c, a predetermined count value (initial value) is displayed (lighted), the count value counts down at a predetermined time interval, and when the game ball detects the game ball again in the area during the countdown, the count value concerned. Returns to the initial value and starts the countdown again to carry out the mini game in which the count value is not made zero.

On the other hand, the display device 41 displays a message prompting the player to launch a game ball so that the count value does not become zero, and when the mini game is successfully continued for a predetermined time, the display device 41
In, a change notice of pending change with a higher expectation than usual (other expectation may be used)
Or perform an effect that suggests the probability setting value.

Here, the “preferred change notice effect with higher expectation than usual” is, for example, an effect in which the expectation degree suggested by the hold display is increased in multiple stages by repeating the success of the mini game (for example, The color of the hold display can be changed from one step (blue→red) to blue→green→red). This makes it possible to focus on the display device 41 and prevent hitting. At that time, it is possible not to apply the effect to the hold corresponding to the outlier, and to increase the contrast of the expectation between the hold of the outfall and the hold of the big hit. As a result, the display device 41 can be focused and the effect of preventing hitting can be enhanced. Of course, if the mini-game fails, or if the execution is stopped midway, the degree of expectation indicated by the hold display returns.

Further, as “another high-effect production”, for example, a group of characters such as fish and animals move in one direction in a special figure variation display game started after succeeding in continuing a mini game for a predetermined time. It is possible to execute the group notice effect and the above-mentioned zone effect for displaying. Further, when the mini game is successfully continued for a predetermined time (in the special figure variation display game being executed), the cut-in notice or the dialogue notice is executed on the display device 41 as “another high-effect production”. You may In this way, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini game for a predetermined time period even with "another effect with high expectations".

Further, as the “effect that suggests the probability setting value”, for example, by displaying specific identification information in the outlier symbol of the special figure variation display game started after succeeding in continuing the mini game for a predetermined time. It is possible to suggest a probability setting value (FIG. 29, B2012).
). For example, if the probability setting value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), "135" is set as the stop symbol, and if it is an even number (2, 4, 6), "246" is set as the stop symbol. Good. Also, with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%), “135” (“246”) of “1”, “2”,
Any one of the symbols "3"("2","4","6") is displayed larger than the other two. Then, it may be suggested with a high probability (for example, 90%) that the numerical value related to the symbol is the probability setting value. Alternatively, as the "effect that suggests the probability setting value", a specific character image appears on the display device 41 and is specified by the color of the character image, as an effect independent of the effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed. It is possible to suggest that the probability setting value is higher than the other probability setting values. In this way, since the “production that suggests the probability setting value” is a privilege, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini game for a predetermined time.

Specifically, for the control of the above-mentioned effect, for example, the game control device 100 uses the gate switch 34a.
It is started when a detection signal is not input for a predetermined time from any switch that detects a game ball such as. Alternatively, it is started when the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect a game ball. At this time, the game control device 100 sends a count value command (initial value) for notifying the count value (initial value) and performing a display prompting the user to continue firing, and causes the effect control device 300 to count down at predetermined time intervals. A count value command informing the counted value is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 35a or the second proximity switch 72b before the count value becomes zero, the game control device 100 transmits a count value command (initial value) to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 displays the count value on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) by the count value command, and performs a display (not necessary) on the display device 41 to urge the player to continue the game ball. And the game control device 100
Sends a predetermined command to effect control device 300 when the duration of the mini game exceeds a predetermined time. Then, the effect control device 300, which has received the predetermined command, performs a pending change notice effect having a higher expectation (reliability) than usual by using the pending display generated thereafter, or an effect that suggests the probability set value. I do. By performing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting down.

The signals of the first proximity switch 72a and the second proximity switch 72b may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such a mini game and effect without the intervention of the game control device 100.

When the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect a game ball, some effect image may be displayed on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41, or a sound effect is output from the speaker 19. You may choose to put it out. As the effect image, in the case of the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device), it is possible to apply a mode in which, for example, a display is performed in which the displayed count value is surrounded by an explosion outline (speech bubble) for a predetermined time. Further, in the case of the display device 41, it is possible to apply a mode in which a moving image in which transparent (or semi-transparent) bubbles climb from bottom to top is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the state in which the game ball is held on the rotary stage 810 is monitored,
It is also preferable that the player can gaze at the display device 41 by displaying it on the display device 41.
For example, each notch 812 is provided with a fifth proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch, etc.), the fifth proximity switch is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is also provided. A command indicating that the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50) has been driven is input to the game control device 100. Then, the effect control device 300 displays an image imitating the rotary stage 810 in a screen corner of the display device 41 or in an area different from the variable display area, the hold display area, and the effect display area, and the game in each cutout portion 812. The presence/absence of a ball and the open/closed state of the gate valve 820 may be displayed.

For example, in the display device 41, a sixth proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch or the like) for detecting a game ball passing through the guide rib 804 is provided, and in the effect control device 300, the sixth proximity switch is a game. Whenever the ball is detected, a video is displayed on the screen in which the game ball enters the rotary stage 810 from the guide rib 804, and when the fifth proximity switch detects the game ball, the game ball enters the corresponding cutout 812 on the screen. The state is displayed so that the state in which the game ball is actually held in the cutout portion 812 can be reflected on the screen. It should be noted that when the ball launching device operates or the player touches the ball launching device (when a touch switch signal is detected), it may be displayed on the screen that the game ball enters the rotary stage 810 from the guide rib 804. .. With these configurations, the player can grasp the situation of the rotary stage 810 on the display device 41 without looking at the rotary stage 810.

It should be noted that regardless of whether the game ball is actually detected by the fifth proximity switch or the sixth proximity switch, a predetermined timing such as the start of the left-handed state (or the display of the left-handed instruction display for instructing the left-handed operation) In addition, a state in which the game ball enters the rotation stage 810 may be displayed as a moving image (may be a still image) on the display device 41 to prompt the player to let the game ball flow down to the rotation stage 810.

Further, a role may be given to the cutout portion 812 on the display. For example, when a game ball enters the cutout portion 812, effect points are given to the player, three of the five cutout portions 812 have 1 point, one of the remaining two cutouts has 5 points, and the other has 10 points. Is given.
The effect points are, for example, points necessary for executing the above-mentioned mini game, and 100 points are consumed per one mini game. In this way, by giving the player the effect points for the mini game, it is possible to give the rotating stage 810 an incentive to cause the game balls to flow down one after another. The production control device 300 controls the above point giving (FIG. 23: B0012) and its display (FIG. 29: B2002, B2004, B200).
7) can be performed. Here, it is preferable that the effect control device 300 displays the current number of points and the number of points consumed in the mini game at a position that does not overlap with other displays on the display device 41.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls that flow down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) win the starting winning opening 36, but as described above, they collide with another game ball and win. There are cases where it does not. In addition, not only the game ball that has flowed down from the extending portion 806 (the guide groove 807) but also the other game ball may win the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the guide groove 807 is also provided with a seventh proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch or the like), the seventh proximity switch is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a is provided. A command corresponding to the detection is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. And production control device 300
Compares the number of times the seventh proximity switch detects a game ball and the number of times the start port 1 switch 36a detects at a predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds or 96 seconds described above), and the start port 1 switch 36a.
When the number of times the game ball is detected is higher, for example, a character such as "Good condition, let's go as it is!" is displayed on the display device 41 (for example, displayed for about 5 seconds), and conversely when the number is low. May display a character such as "Next is all right!" (for example, it may be displayed for about 5 seconds or not). In this way, by displaying a message that encourages the player, it is possible to prevent hitting.

The fifth proximity switch, the sixth proximity switch, and the seventh proximity switch are electrically connected to the game control device 100, and a command indicating that the fifth proximity switch has been detected from the game control device 100 is issued. It may be sent to the performance control device 300.

[First Modification]
FIG. 52A is a rotary unit 800 that constitutes a first modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment.
FIG. 45 is a plan view (sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44 ). In the first modification, a component that changes the rolling direction of the game ball in the rotating body unit 800 is added. As shown in FIG. 52,
One or a plurality of obstacle nails 830 (rolling direction conversion members) are implanted (arranged) at a position different from the position where the cutout portion 812 of the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is arranged. By implanting the obstacle nail 830 in the rotary stage 810, the game ball is temporarily retained in the rotary stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotary stage 810 is irregularly changed. The interest can be improved.

When one obstacle nail 830 is to be implanted, it can be implanted at any position other than the cutout portion 812 of the rotary stage 810. Further, when a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are planted, it is desirable that the distance between adjacent obstacle nails 830 be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll toward the center of the rotary stage 810, and the game ball at the center can also roll toward the cutout portion 812 or the tray portion 801, and the entire rotary stage 810 plays the game. The ball can be rolled irregularly.

Further, when a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are planted, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the nails 830 may be planted so that the arrangement thereof has the same central symmetry as the cutout portion 812. In FIG. 52, 5
Since the two cutouts 812 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (5-fold symmetry), the obstacle nail 83
The arrangement pattern of 0 is also planted so as to be 5-fold symmetrical (5-pointed star shape). As a result, the game ball can be directed to any of the cutout portions 812 with the same probability. Of course, the disposition manner of the obstacle nails 830 may be a disposition manner in which the obstacle nails 830 are planted at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on a circle concentric with the rotary stage 810 (a circle having a radius smaller than the radius of the rotary stage 810).

Further, it is preferable to dispose a rebound member 840 (for example, a sling shot or flipper) that repels the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotary stage 810 on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801. The bounce member 840 is a member that mechanically (or electrically) operates when it receives a game ball and bounces the game ball toward the upper side of the inclined rolling surface 802 or rolling surface 811 (the direction away from the game area 32). Is.

As a mode of flipping up the game ball, like a rebound member 840 shown on the left side of FIG. 52,
There is a mode in which the tray portion 801 receives a game ball that rolls at a substantially right angle toward the game area 32 and bounces directly toward the rotary stage 810. Further, the rebound member 840 shown on the right side of FIG.
As described above, it receives a game ball rolling at a shallow angle toward the game area 32, and bounces back toward above the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801, and then the game ball is wall portions 803A, 803B, 80.
There is a mode in which the light can be reflected by 3C and rolled toward the rotary stage 810. In any case, since the game ball rolling on the rotary stage 810 is directed toward the rotary stage 810 again, the game ball is temporarily retained in the tray portion 801 or the rotary stage 810, and the cutout portion 8 is formed.
The degree of expectation that 12 holds the game ball can be increased.

In the first modification, both the obstacle nail 830 and the bounce member 840 are arranged in the rotating body unit 800, but only one of them may be arranged.

[Second Modification]
FIG. 52B is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of a rotating body unit 800 that constitutes a second modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. In the second modified example, instead of the obstacle nail 830 of the first modified example, a second rotary stage 890 that rotates coaxially with the rotary stage 810 is provided in the center of the rotary stage 810. The rotary stage 810 is hollowed into a cylindrical shape, and the second rotary stage 890 is arranged in the hollowed-out portion. Second rotary stage 89
0 is arranged so as to be slightly exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Further, on the second rotation stage 890, a plurality of second cutout portions 891 (second holding portions) capable of accommodating game balls are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction (three in FIG. 52B).

The radial opening of the second cutout 891 is opened, and the second cutout 891 is formed.
The bottom surface of the above is substantially flush with the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the rotary stage 810 easily enters and is held in the second cutout portion 891. On the other hand, since the second cutout portion 891 does not have a member for closing the opening in the radial direction, when the opening in the radial direction of the second cutout portion 891 faces the game area 32 side (downward). When tilted), the game ball held in the second cutout portion 891 can be easily separated from the radial opening of the second cutout portion 891. By applying the second rotary stage 890, the interest in the rolling direction of the game ball can be improved.

The rotation direction of the second rotary stage 890 is preferably opposite to that of the rotary stage 810 (may be the same direction). The rotation cycle of the second rotation stage 890 may be synchronized with the rotation cycle of the rotation stage 810. The rotation cycle of the second rotation stage 890 may be half the rotation cycle of the rotation stage 810, or may be asynchronous and an arbitrary rotation cycle may be applied.

The second rotary stage 890 can be driven by a motor different from the rotary stage 810, and the same motor as the rotary stage 810 (rotary stage motor 14
It is also possible to drive by 3). The second rotary stage 890 is replaced with the rotary stage 81.
When driven by the same motor as 0, the rotary stage 810 and the second rotary stage 890
Is mechanically coupled by a gear, and the gear ratio is appropriately designed, whereby the rotation ratio of the rotary stage 810 and the second rotary stage 890 can be appropriately designed.

[Third Modification]
FIG. 53 is a perspective view of a third modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of a distribution device 850 that constitutes a third modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the third modification, the distribution device 850 is arranged at a position in the middle of the warp passage 40e.
The distribution device 850 includes a first branch flow path 851 that branches at an intermediate position of the warp passage 40e,
A first switching valve 853 (which is arranged at the branch position of the warp passage 40e and is capable of switching the passage of the game ball flowing down into the warp passage 40e between the passage toward the rotary stage 810 and the first branch passage 851 ( (Second valve) and a third proximity switch 72c for detecting a game ball in the warp passage 40e.
(First detection means, FIG. 50, FIG. 54). The outlet 852 of the first branch flow path 851 (
53) communicates with the game area 32 (the game area 32 that does not pass through the rotary unit 800). By applying this distribution device 850, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 54( a ), the first switching valve 853 normally has a biasing means (spring or the like) so that a portion of the warp passage 40 e upstream of the first switching valve 853 communicates with the rotary stage 810. ) Is rotated by the urging force. Then, each time the third proximity switch 72c detects a predetermined number of game balls, the valve solenoid 145 (FIG. 50) is driven to rotate the first switching valve 853 in the opposite direction, and FIG. 54(b). As shown in, the portion of the warp passage 40e upstream of the first switching valve 853 communicates with the first branch flow passage 851 (game area 32). Further, when the third proximity switch 72c detects a game ball flowing down to the warp passage 40e next time, the valve solenoid 14
The driving of No. 5 is stopped and the first switching valve 853 is rotated to the original position by the urging force of the urging means (not shown). In addition, the first switching valve 853 by the urging force of the urging means (not shown).
And the rotation direction of the first switching valve 853 by the driving force of the valve solenoid 145 may be opposite to each other.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the third proximity switch 72c, returns to zero every time the count reaches a set count value, and becomes a state in which counting is possible again and the first switching. A valve solenoid 145 (which drives the valve 853 (second valve))
50), and when the detection signal is input next, the drive signal is stopped (see FIG. 50).
). Alternatively, the distribution device 850 may include a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit/stop the drive signal similarly to the game control device 100. By changing the set count value, it is possible to arbitrarily change the distribution ratio of the game balls in the distribution device 850. In any case, according to the third modified example, it is possible to adjust so that the game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 do not increase too much.

In addition, without providing the third proximity switch 72c (without counting the game balls), the first switching valve 853 is rotated at a predetermined cycle and maintained for a certain period, and the flow path of the game balls is first branched. The flow path 851 may be switched to. Even in this way, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fourth Modification]
FIG. 55 is a front view of a fourth modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of a first distribution unit 860 (distribution unit) that constitutes a fourth modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the fourth modified example, a first distribution unit 860 that distributes whether or not to distribute game balls to the rotary unit 800 is arranged. The first distribution unit 860 is arranged at a position upstream of the game ball with respect to the inflow port 40a of the game area 32.

The first sorting unit 860 is a unit main body 861, an inlet 862 arranged at an upper part of the unit main body 861 for introducing a game ball, and a discharge port arranged at a lower part of the unit main body 861 for discharging the game ball to the game area 32 again. 863 and a second intake channel 864 extending from the unit main body 861 and communicating with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800).

Here, an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted at a position above the introduction port 862 of the game area 32, but the game ball flowing down to the left side of the game area 32 has an arbitrary ratio (probability density). Is a maximum ratio, for example, 50%, and is planted so as to flow down to the inlet 862.

The second intake passage 864 communicates the inlet 862 with the inlet 40a. From the position in the middle of the second intake channel 864 in the unit main body 861, the second branch channel 865
And the second branch flow path 865 communicates with the discharge port 863. In addition, the second intake channel 8
At the branch position of 64 with the second branch flow path 865, the flow path of the game ball flowing down from the introduction port 862 flows down toward the inflow port 40a (the downstream portion of the second intake flow path 864 from the branch position). A second switching valve 866 (third valve) that can be switched is attached to the flow path and the flow path that flows down toward the second branch flow path 865. In addition, the second intake passage 864 includes the second intake passage 8
A fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means, FIG. 50) for detecting the game ball flowing down to 64 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 56( a ), the second switching valve 866 is normally arranged so that a portion of the second intake passage 864 upstream of the second switching valve 866 communicates with the second branch passage 865. Has been done. And, each time the fourth proximity switch 72d detects a predetermined number of game balls, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven, and as shown in FIG. 56(b), the portion upstream of the second switching valve 866 of the second intake passage 864. Is communicated with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800).

Conversely, as shown in FIG. 56( b ), normally, the second switching valve 866 of the second intake passage 864 is normally used.
It may be arranged such that a portion upstream thereof is communicated with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800). Then, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven each time a predetermined number of game balls are detected, and as shown in FIG. 56(b), a portion upstream of the second switching valve 866 of the second intake passage 864. May communicate with the second branch flow channel 865.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the fourth proximity switch 72d, returns to zero each time the count number reaches a set count value, and becomes a countable state again and the second switching A valve solenoid 146 (for driving the valve 866 (third valve))
50), and when the detection signal is input next, the drive signal is stopped (see FIG. 50).
). Alternatively, the first distribution unit 860 may include a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit/stop the drive signal similarly to the game control device 100. By changing the set count value, it is possible to arbitrarily change the distribution ratio of the game balls in the first distribution unit 860.

It should be noted that without providing the fourth proximity switch 72d (without counting the game balls), the first switching valve 853 is rotated at a predetermined cycle and maintained for a certain period of time, thereby making the flow path of the game balls second. The branch channel 865 may be switched to. Even in this way, it is possible to adjust the number of game balls flowing down to the inflow port 40a and thus the rotary stage 810.

[Fifth Modification]
FIG. 57 is a second distribution unit 8 which constitutes a fifth modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment.
It is a schematic diagram of 70 (sorting unit). FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing an operation of distributing game balls by the second distributing unit 870. In the fifth modified example, the rotating body unit 8
The second distribution unit 870, which allocates whether or not the game balls are distributed to 00, is arranged at the same position as the first distribution unit 860 of the fourth modified example, but the distribution can be performed mechanically.

The second distribution unit 870 of the fifth modified example communicates with the inlet 872 into which the game ball is introduced, the two outlets 873 from which the game ball is discharged, and the inlet 872, and branches downward from the middle. The Y-shaped channel 874 (third branch channel) that communicates with the two outlets 873, and the two outlets 8 that are arranged at the branch position of the Y-shaped channel 874 and are switched each time a game ball is received.
It is provided with a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 including a third switching valve 875 for alternately flowing down the game balls toward 73.

The distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that one outlet 873 of the distribution mechanism 871 in the front stage communicates with the inlet 872 of the distribution mechanism 871 in the rear stage. Then, at least one of the outlets 873 (not communicating with the inlet 872) that is the end of the plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 communicates with the inlet 40a (rotating body unit 800). In FIG. 57, the distribution mechanism 871 has four stages in series (the distribution mechanisms 871A, 871B,
871C, 871D). The number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 is arbitrary, and the ratio of the game balls to be flown into the inflow port 40a with respect to the launched game balls (start value S
It depends on the design value of)). Further, the smaller the number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 (especially if it is one stage), the more advantageous in terms of cost.

The operation of the distribution mechanism 871 will be described with reference to FIG. The third switching valve 875 (switching valve) that configures the distribution mechanism 871 includes a rotating member 876 and a stopper portion 883 that abuts on the rotating member 876 and restricts the rotation of the rotating member 876, and the Y-shaped flow path 874. (Fig. 57
) Is located at the branch position.

The rotating member 876 has an inverted T shape in which the T shape is upside down, and is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the horizontal bar portion and the longitudinal direction of the vertical bar portion at the joining position of the horizontal bar portion and the vertical bar portion of the inverted T shape. It has a rotating shaft 880 extending in any direction. The rotating member 876 includes an upright portion 877 forming an inverted T-shaped vertical rod portion, a right bottom portion 878 forming a portion of the inverted T-shaped horizontal rod portion on the right side of the rotation shaft 880, and an inverted T-shaped portion. Left bottom part 8 forming a part on the left side of the rotation shaft 880 of the horizontal bar part of the
79 and.

The stopper member 883 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879. That is, as shown in FIG. 58A, when the rotating member 876 rotates clockwise, the right bottom portion 878 abuts on the stopper member 883, and at this time, the upright portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined rightward and upward from the rotating shaft 880. The bottom portion 879 is arranged so as to be inclined to the left above from the rotation shaft 880. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 58B, when the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise, the left bottom portion 879 abuts on the stopper member 883, and at this time, the standing portion 877 inclines leftward and upward from the rotating shaft 880. The arrangement is such that the right bottom portion 878 is inclined rightward and upward from the rotation shaft 880.

Here, in FIG. 58A or FIG. 58B, the center of gravity of the upright portion 877 and the right bottom portion 878 are shown.
The center of gravity of the integrated body (bottom portion) composed of the left bottom portion 879 exists on the opposite sides of the rotary shaft 880. Therefore, the moment (torque) that the standing portion 877 gives to the rotating shaft 880 due to gravity and the moment (torque) that the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 give to the rotating shaft 880 due to gravity are in mutually opposite directions. However, the moment related to the upright portion 877 is the right bottom portion 878.
And is designed to be larger than the moment associated with the left bottom portion 879. Therefore, the state of FIG. 58(a) or FIG. 58(b) is stably maintained unless the game ball abuts.

Therefore, when the rotating member 876 is released, the right bottom portion 878 is in contact with the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58A, or the left bottom portion 879 is in contact with the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58B. One of the contacting states, and the standing portion 877 standing vertically (
The right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 are almost stationary in a horizontal state). Further, even if the standing portion 877 stands still in a vertical state, the game ball abuts on the rotating member 876 to rotate the rotating member 876 in either direction, so that the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879 is formed. Is in contact with the stopper member 883.

The side surface on the right bottom portion 878 side of the standing portion 877 and the upper surface of the right bottom portion 878 form a right receiving portion 881 that receives a game ball, and the side surface on the left bottom portion 879 side of the standing portion 877 and the upper surface of the left bottom portion 879 form a game ball. It is a left receiving portion 882 for receiving. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from the inlet 872 is
It is temporarily held by the right receiving portion 881 or the left receiving portion 882.

As shown in FIG. 58A, when the left receiving portion 882 receives and temporarily holds the game ball,
The game ball is arranged at a position biased to the left bottom portion 879 side with respect to the rotation shaft 880. At this time, the moment that the game ball gives to the rotating shaft 880 by gravity and the moment that the rotating member 876 gives to the rotating shaft 880 (the difference between the moment of the upright portion 877 and the bottom moment composed of the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879) is Although the directions are opposite to each other, the moment related to the game ball is larger than the moment related to the rotating member 876. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58B, the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise toward the left bottom portion 879 while holding the game ball.
Contacts the stopper member 883. At this time, the left bottom portion 879 is arranged so as to be inclined leftward and downward from the rotation shaft 880, so that the game ball rolls on the left bottom portion 879 toward the tip of the left bottom portion 879 and is separated from the rotation member 876 and one of the discharge ports is provided. Run down towards 873. Further, the upright portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined to the upper left side from the rotation shaft 880. As described above, the moment the standing portion 877 imparts to the rotating shaft 880 causes the bottom portion (right bottom portion 878 and left bottom portion 879) to rotate shaft 8.
Since the moment is larger than the moment given to 80, the left bottom portion 879 maintains the state of contacting the stopper member 883 even after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876, and the right receiving portion 881 can receive the next game ball. Become.

Then, when the next game ball flows down from the inlet 872, the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball and temporarily holds it, as shown in FIG. 58(b). At this time, FIG.
As shown in (b), in the arrangement in which the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball, the game ball is arranged at a position closer to the right bottom portion 878 than the rotation shaft 880. In this case as well, for the same reason as above, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8(a), the rotating member 876 rotates to the right bottom portion 878 side while holding the game ball, and the right bottom portion 878 contacts the stopper member 883. At this time, the right bottom portion 878 is attached to the rotary shaft 8
Since the game ball is inclined downward to the right from 80, the game ball rolls on the right bottom portion 878 toward the tip of the right bottom portion 878, separates from the rotating member 876, and flows down toward the other discharge port 873. Further, the standing portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined rightward and upward from the rotation shaft 880. For the same reason as above, even after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876, the right bottom portion 878 remains in contact with the stopper member 883, and the left receiving portion 882 can receive the next game ball. ..

As described above, the third switching valve 875 alternately turns in the opposite direction each time the game ball is received, so that the game ball can be alternately distributed toward the one discharge port 873 and the other discharge port 873. it can.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the case of introducing game balls from the inlet 872A of the distribution mechanism 871A of the most upstream stage, the distribution when the first to 17th game balls are introduced in that order Think As shown in FIG. 57, assuming that all the third switching valves 875 are tilted to the left in the initial state, odd-numbered game balls are distributed toward the right-side discharge port 873 in the first-stage distribution mechanism 871A. The even-numbered game balls are sorted toward the left outlet 873.

In the distribution mechanism 871 of the second stage, the 1st, 5th, 9th, 13th, and 17th gaming balls are distributed toward the right outlet 873, and the 3rd, 7th, 11th, and 15th.
The second gaming ball is sorted toward the left outlet 873.

In the distribution mechanism 871 of the third stage, the first, ninth, and seventeenth game balls are distributed toward the right outlet 873, and the fifth and thirteenth game balls are distributed toward the left outlet 873. To be

In the distribution mechanism 871 of the fourth stage, the first and 17th game balls are the right outlet 87.
The third game ball is distributed to the left side outlet 873. When the 16th game ball is distributed here, the third switching valve 875 is returned to the initial state, and the 17th game ball is distributed in the same manner as the 1st game ball. Therefore, the second distribution unit 870 repeats the operation of distributing the game balls with 16 pieces as one cycle.

Therefore, as shown in the following (1) to (9), the second distribution unit 870 appropriately selects the discharge port 873 that communicates with the inflow port 40a, thereby playing the game at a ratio of 1/16 to 15/16. The sphere can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800.

(1): When one of the outlets 873D (any of which is the terminal end) of the distribution mechanism 871D of the fourth stage is communicated with the inlet 40a, a ratio of 1 to 16 is provided, that is, 1/16
The game ball can be made to flow toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of. The remaining outlets 873A, 873B, 873C, 873D are opened to the game area 32 (the area where the game ball does not flow down to the inlet 40a) (the same applies hereinafter).

(2): Both outlets 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, or the opened outlet 873C (terminating) of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C is inlet. When communicating with 40a, the game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 2 to 16, that is, a ratio of 2/16.

(3): When one of the outlets 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D and the opened outlet 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C are communicated with the inflow port 40a, a ratio of three to sixteen, that is, The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 3/16.

(4): The open outlet 873B (which is the end) of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B is communicated with the inlet 40a, or the opened outlets 873C and 4 of the third sorting mechanism 871C are connected. When both the outlets 873D of the distribution mechanism 871D of the stage are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the game balls are distributed to the rotating body unit 8 at a ratio of 4 to 16, that is, 4/16.
It can be made to flow toward 00.

(5): When the opened discharge port 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B and one discharge port 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D are connected to the inlet 40a, a ratio of 5 to 16 is obtained, that is, The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 5/16.

(6): The outlet 873B at the end of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, both the outlet 873C that is open in the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C, or the outlet 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D, When 16 are communicated with the inflow port 40a, a ratio of 6 out of 16 or 6/
The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 16.

(7): The open outlet 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, the open outlet 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C, and one outlet 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D. When communicating with the inflow port 40a, a ratio of 7 out of 16 or 7/16
The game ball can be made to flow toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of.

(8): The opened discharge port 873A (which is the end) of the first-stage distribution mechanism 871A communicates with the inflow port 40a, or the opened discharge port 873B of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B, When the opened discharge port 873C of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C and both discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, 16
The game balls can be made to flow toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 8/16.

(9): In the above (1) to (7), when the open outlet 873A of the first-stage sorting mechanism 871A is further communicated with each other, the game balls are rotated at a ratio of 9/16 to 15/16, respectively. It can be made to flow toward 800.

In the fourth modified example, the distribution mechanism 871 is connected in four stages in series, but it may be in one stage only, or in two-stage series, three-stage series, or in a manner in which five or more stages are connected in series. In addition,
In the distribution unit 860 of the third modification, the distribution mechanism (the second switching valve 866) has one stage, but a mode in which a plurality of stages are connected in series as in the fourth modification can also be applied.

[Probability density distribution of start value S]
FIG. 59 is a graph comparing the probability density distribution of the start value S of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment with the probability density distribution of the start value S of the conventional gaming machine. For example, 100 game balls per minute
In a gaming machine that shoots individual pieces, the start value S can be defined as the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated when 100 gaming balls have been shot (the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed), and the gaming ball has won the starting winning opening 36. It is synonymous with the number of times. Therefore, for example, when the game balls are continuously fired and the special symbol is changed 6.25 times per minute, the start value S is 6.25 times/minute.

On the other hand, in the conventional gaming machine, the game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills implanted in the game area 32, and some of the game balls enter the start winning opening 36. However, the rolling direction of the game ball changes irregularly due to obstacle nails and windmills.

Therefore, the start value S is a value that has a certain probability density (probability=1) at the start value S in the coordinate system with the horizontal axis representing the random variable (start value S) and the vertical axis representing the probability density, and other values. It can be defined as a point on the probability density curve where the value is the center of the random variable and the probability density has a peak value, not the point on the delta function where the probability density becomes zero.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, when the set start value (design value) is set to 6.25, the actually observed start value S is centered at 6.25. It will be observed with a probability on the probability density distribution curve (A) having a very wide distribution and a low peak value. In particular, in the probability density distribution curve (A), even if the start value S is 0 or 1, it has a constant probability density, so this becomes a slump of the start value S (becomes extremely small), and the game ball is started at the winning opening 36. It is difficult to make a stable prize.

Also, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the setting start value is changed, as described above,
Although the position of the horizontal axis of the probability density distribution curve (A) changes, its peak value remains low,
The start value S cannot be effectively changed even on the side of the game hall (hall), and it is difficult for the player to experience the change in the start value S.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the probability setting value for setting the probability of occurrence of a big hit can be changed, the start value S has a slump as described above, so that the probability setting value changes on the hole side as well. Is difficult to reflect as a change in the occurrence probability of a big hit, and it is also difficult for a player to experience a change in the probability setting value as a change in the occurrence probability of a big hit.

On the other hand, the third embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of game balls held by the rotating body unit 800 (rotary stage 810) are periodically made to flow down toward the start winning opening 36, and the game balls are started winning. The mouth 36 almost certainly wins. Note that one minute or more of the game balls corresponding to the design start value S are supplied from the warp passage 40e to the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, for example, the set start value is set to 6.2.
When set to 5, the actually observed start value S is a point on the probability density distribution curve (B) with a narrow distribution centering at 6.25 and a high peak value. And the probability density distribution curve (
In B), since the peak value is high, the frequency at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 becomes extremely high near the start value S=6.25. Further, the probability density when the start value S is 0 or 1 is almost zero, and the slump does not substantially occur at the start value S.

Therefore, on the hole side, the start value S can be set low, and even in this case, the slump does not occur and the variation of the special symbol (variable display game) is almost certainly performed, so that the decrease in the interest can be suppressed. it can. Further, since the degree of reflection in the change in the probability of occurrence of a big hit due to the change in the probability setting value is high, profit adjustment can be easily performed.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the start value S is stable, the rotating body unit 800
By holding the game ball before winning, the starting winning is mechanically held virtually. Therefore, the starting winning generated when the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 is triggered is electrically held (memorized).
It is also possible to omit the configuration (start prize winning memory, start memory) or reduce the maximum limit for holding.

A case will be described where the set start value=6.25 is realized in the fourth modified example or the fifth modified example. 100 game balls are left-handedly shot per minute and flow down to the game area 32,
The game balls are distributed to the distribution units (the first distribution unit 860 and the second distribution unit 870) with an average probability of 1/2 by the planted obstacle nails, and at a ratio (probability) of 1 out of 8 in the distribution unit. Considering that the game balls that have flowed down to the rotating body stage will almost win the starting winning opening 36, the start value S is (100 pieces/minute)×(1/2)×(1
/8)=6.25 pieces/minute. Here, in the fourth modification (first distribution unit 860), the set count value is set to 7 (the count number of the detection signal of the fourth proximity switch 72d is an integer from 0 to 7), and the fifth modification (second In the distribution unit 870), by adopting the configuration of (2) above, it is possible to cause the game balls to flow down to the rotary stage 810 at a ratio (probability) of 1 in 8.

Further, in the third embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotary stage 810 is changed, or the drive timing of the sluice valve 820 (valve solenoid 144) is changed (the rotation speed and the drive timing are changed in association with the change of the probability setting value). The setting start value can be easily changed. At this time, the probability density distribution curve (B
) Will shift along the horizontal axis while maintaining a high peak value. Therefore, the change in the set start value can be directly reflected as the change in the start value S.

Therefore, for example, with respect to the gaming machine 10 designed with a low start value S=5.2, a normal gaming state is achieved between the gaming machine 10 designed with a general start value S=5.8 with the same payout rate (base). Although a difference occurs in the payout, the payout corresponding to the difference can be designed to be returned to the player as a special payout (prize ball due to a big hit or the like) (for example, the number of big hit rounds is increased). As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a game-oriented gaming machine that is "sweet" and "attractive".

The spread of the distribution width of the probability density distribution curve (B) is mainly due to the variation of the flow path of the game balls flowing down from the obstacle nail located upstream of the distribution unit (the first distribution unit 860 and the second distribution unit 870). It is considered that this is due to variations in the flow path of the game balls flowing down toward the starting winning opening 36 without passing through the cutout portion 812. Further, in the case where there is no distribution unit, it also results from variations in the flow path of the game balls flowing down from the obstacle nail arranged in the game area 32 upstream of the inflow port 40a toward the inflow port 40a. In this way, by giving a certain degree of distribution width to the probability density distribution curve (B), it is possible not only to realize a stable start value S, but also to cause an accidental start winning, which makes the game interesting. Can be improved.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, a player can surely generate a certain number of fluctuations (variable display game) with a certain investment amount, and the maker side stabilizes the start value S. Can be set low, and on the side of the game hall (hall), profit adjustment can be easily performed by changing the probability setting value.

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the game area 32, the winning area (starting winning opening 36 and the like) arranged in the gaming area 32, and the winning of the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36). It is provided with a winning stabilizing means (a guiding means, a rotating body unit 800) for stabilizing. For example, the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) can hold a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and the held game balls are directed to the winning area (starting winning opening 36 etc.). A guiding unit (rotating body unit 800) capable of repeatedly performing the guiding operation is provided. Alternatively, the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) can retain a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and guide the retained game balls toward the prize area (starting winning opening 36). Guiding means (rotating body unit 800, obstacle nail 830, rebound member 840) capable of repeatedly performing the operation
Equipped with. As a result, it is possible to stably enter the game ball into the winning area and enhance the interest of the game. As a result, the start value S can be always stabilized. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, it was not possible to fully enjoy the rolling of the game ball, but with the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) of the present embodiment, the rolling of the game ball is prevented. You can enjoy the situation and your interest will improve. In particular, the present embodiment is directed to the game balls before winning the prize, and enjoy the rolling of the game balls before winning by the prize stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) immediately after starting the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In the third embodiment, the winning area is the starting winning opening 36. This makes it possible to constantly stabilize the start value S related to the variation (variation display game) that occurs due to the winning of the winning a prize opening 36.

In the third embodiment, a game ball is guided in the game area 32 (rotating body unit 800).
Distribution unit (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit)
A distribution unit 870) is arranged. Thereby, the start value S can be further stabilized.

In the third embodiment, the guiding unit (rotating body unit 800) has a predetermined cycle (for example, 8 units).
It is possible to guide the game balls held for one second toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) one by one.
As a result, it is possible to carry out a variation of the symbol (variation display game) at regular intervals.

In the third embodiment, the duration (variation time) of the variable display game that is started by the winning of the game ball in the winning area (starting winning opening 36 and the like) is substantially the same as the cycle. As a result, both the variable display game and the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be made to pay attention, and a state where only the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is gazing can be avoided.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) does not operate while waiting for a customer. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption while waiting for customers.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) operates in the first launching mode (left hitting) in which the game ball can flow down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800), and the first shooting mode (left hitting). The operation is stopped in the second firing mode (right strike) different from (1). This avoids the power consumption of the guiding means (rotating stage 810) during the second firing mode (right hitting), and holds the gaming ball in the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) when the number of holdings is maximum. It is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily entering the winning area (starting winning opening 36).

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is arranged so as to surround the rotary stage 810 around which the game ball supplied from the game area 32 rolls, and the rotary stage 810 flows down from the rotary stage 810. Tray section 8 for letting the game balls flow down to the game area 32
01, and a plurality of holding portions (notch portions 812) for holding the game balls are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction on the periphery of the rotary stage 810, and the rotary stage 810 rotates on the tray portion 801. Sequentially communicates with the holding portion (notch portion 812), and the holding portion (notch portion 812).
) That guides the game ball held in) toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) and the first valve (gate valve 820) that repeatedly performs the operation of closing and opening the inlet of the guiding groove 807.
), and are arranged. As a result, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) has a simple structure.
Can be built.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (gate valve 820) opens the guide groove 807 when the guide groove 807 faces the holding portion (notch portion 812). As a result, the game ball held in the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be surely caused to flow down into the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the holding portion (notch portion 812) has a notch shape that is opened on the upper surface and the side surface of the rotary stage 810, and the holding surface (notch portion) is flush with the same plane formed by the upper surface of the rotary stage 810. The distance from the bottom surface of 812) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to configure the holding portion (cutout portion 812) with a simple structure and to hold the holding portion (cutout portion 81).
The game ball held in 2) is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed by bringing the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 into contact with the game ball held in the notch 812. Further, since the depth of the cutout portion 812 (holding portion) is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 (holding portion) collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811. Cutout 81
It is possible to reduce the popping-out from 2 (holding portion).

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801 are inclined downward toward the game area 32. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be surely flown down to the game area 32.

In the third embodiment, the tray portion 801 is provided with an extending portion 806 extending from the end on the game area 32 side toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) in a plan view, and the guide groove 807 is an extending portion. 80
The first valve (dividing valve 820) is formed so as to communicate with the tip of 6 and the distance to the base portion of the extending portion 806 (the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32) is greater than the radius of the game ball. Is also arranged so as to be shorter, higher than the rolling surface 802 of the game ball of the tray portion 801 when it is closed (crossing the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802), and the guide groove when opened. 8
It is arranged so as to be below the height of the bottom surface of 07. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the game ball rolling in the direction directly toward the guide groove 807 in the tray portion 801 enters the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the distance between the tip of the extending portion 806 and the winning area (starting winning opening 36) in the height direction is longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the tip of the extending portion 806 toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) collides with the flowing game ball without passing through the extending portion 806, and the winning is hindered. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the game balls that have flowed down without going through the extension portion 806 will win the winning area (starting winning opening 36). Therefore, it is possible to give a certain amount of variation in the frequency of winnings to the winning area (starting winning opening 36) of the game ball, that is, the start value S.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (dividing valve 820) has the rotary stage 810 when closed.
Are arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the upper surface. As a result, the rotary stage 8
It is possible to reduce the frequency with which the game ball that has rolled from 10 without passing through the holding portion (notch portion 812) directly enters the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 rotates in reverse at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to avoid ball biting in the rotary stage 810. In addition, it is possible to suggest a specific game state (such as a change in latency) by the operation.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 is arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the tray portion 801, and the step between the rotary stage 810 and the same plane is smaller than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball gets over the step and rides on the rotary stage 810, so that the rolling direction when riding on the rotary stage 810 can be irregularly changed. Further, it is possible to easily collect the game balls in front of the rotary stage 810 and delay the timing of flowing down to the rotary stage 810.

In the third embodiment, a rolling direction conversion member (obstacle nail 830) capable of converting the rolling direction of the game ball is arranged in a region other than the region where the holding portion of the rotary stage 810 is formed. Thereby, the game ball can be temporarily retained on the rotary stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball during rolling of the rotary stage 810 can be irregularly changed.

In the third embodiment, on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801, a bounce member 840 (sling shot, flipper) for returning a game ball rolling on the tray portion 801 toward the rotary stage 810 is arranged. As a result, the game ball ejected from the rotary stage 810 can be returned to the rotary stage 810 again, and the game ball is temporarily placed in the tray portion 801.
Alternatively, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the game ball is retained on the rotating stage 810 and the game ball is retained by the retaining portion (notch portion 812).

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) takes in the game ball flowing down the game area 32 and can supply it to the rotating stage 810 (first warp passage 4).
0e), a first detection means (third proximity switch 72c) for detecting a game ball flowing down into the first intake passage (warp passage 40e), and a branch from the middle of the first intake passage (warp passage 40e). Is arranged at a branch position between the first branch flow channel 851 communicating with the game area 32 and the first branch flow channel 851 of the first intake flow channel (warp passage 40e), and the first intake flow channel (warp passage 40e). The flow path of the game ball that has flowed down to, the flow path that flows down to the rotary stage 810, and the flow path that flows down to the first branch flow path 851, a second valve (first switching valve 853) that can be switched, The second valve (first switching valve 853) operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the first detection means (third proximity switch 72c). Thereby, it is possible to adjust so that the game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 do not increase too much.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) includes an introduction port 862 into which a game ball is introduced, and directs the game ball introduced into the introduction port 862 toward the guide means (rotating body unit 800). The second intake passage 864 to be flowed down, the second intake passage 865 branching from the middle of the second intake passage 864 to communicate with the game area 32, and the second intake passage 865 of the second intake passage 864. Of the second intake flow path 864
The third valve (third valve) that can switch the flow path of the game ball that has flowed down to the flow path that flows down toward the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) and the flow path that flows down to the second branch flow path 865. 2 switching valve 866) and a second detection means (fourth proximity switch 72d) for detecting the game ball flowing down to the second intake flow path 864, and the third valve (second switching valve 866), It operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the second detection means (fourth proximity switch 72d). This allows the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) to be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) includes an introduction port 872 into which a game ball is introduced, two discharge ports 873 from which a game ball is discharged, and an introduction port 872.
The third branch flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874), which is connected to the second discharge port 873 while being connected to the third branch flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874), is arranged at the branch position of the game. Each time the ball is received, the switching operation is performed to alternately flow the game ball toward the two discharge ports 873.
5 and a plurality of sorting mechanisms 871. The distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that one outlet 873 of the distribution mechanism 871 in the front stage communicates with the inlet 872 of the distribution mechanism 871 in the rear stage, and a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 (distribution mechanism 871A, distribution mechanism 871B, At least one of the outlets 873 at the end of the distribution mechanism 871C and the distribution mechanism 871D is in communication with the guiding unit (rotating body unit 800). As a result, a distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) that mechanically distributes the game balls can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, by the third detection means (second proximity switch 72b) and the third detection means (second proximity switch 72b) for detecting that the game area 32 has passed a specific position different from the winning area. Lighting display means (upper effect unit 40c, display device 41) for performing lighting display based on detection of a game ball is provided. As a result, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800
Even when the holding portion (notch portion 812) of) holds all the game balls, it is possible to reduce the hitting of the game balls.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and the duplicate description will be omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device]
FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 60, unlike FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, in the game control device 100 (main board, main board), the output circuit 134-137 does not exist, the electric circuit is simplified, and the number of wires (the number of signals) )
Can be reduced, and a sufficient space (place) for arranging electronic parts can be secured. This is as follows, the game microcomputer 111 (CPU111a) and each driver 138a-138d
, 150 and the relay board 70 are performed by serial communication instead of conventional parallel communication. In addition, serial communication is performed between the game microcomputer 111 and the effect control device 300, between the game microcomputer 111 and the payout control device 200, and between the game microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500, that is, the first embodiment. Is no different.

Data from the serial port 173a (first serial port) of the gaming microcomputer 111 is serially communicated (serial method) via the serial signal line 174a to the driver 138a.
-138d, transmitted to the driver 150. Serial port 17 of gaming microcomputer 111
Data from 3b (second serial port) is transmitted to the relay board 70 by serial communication (serial method) via the serial signal line 174b. In FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, data is transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 by parallel communication (parallel method). In the present embodiment, the serial communication is synchronous serial communication and is performed by, for example, SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), but is not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, each of the drivers 138c and 138d is a part of one driver IC chip 156 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). Driver 138b, 15
Each 0 is a part of one driver IC chip 157 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). Each driver may be provided as one IC chip.

The game control device 100 (main board) has a connector section 160 (CN1) for connecting to a relay board 70 that supplies a test shooting test signal to the test shooting test apparatus, and the relay board 70 is
It has a connector part 162 (CN2) for connecting to the game control device 100 (main board).
The connector part 160 and the connector part 162 are insertion ports for electric wires such as cables (or harnesses) and are electrically connected to each other by cables or the like. In addition, like the buffer 133,
The connector section 160 (CN1) is also a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop.

[Circuit diagram of game control device]
61A, 61B, and 62 are circuit diagrams illustrating a part of an electric circuit (electronic circuit) provided in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) according to the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the positions of electronic components (IC chips, etc.), elements, terminals, etc. in the circuit diagram and the positions where they are actually arranged on the substrate may be irrelevant. The terminal may be a pin, for example. In the present embodiment, the board means a circuit board such as a printed board.

The serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a terminal A1 for serial data signal (TXA), a terminal A2 for serial clock signal (CKA), and a chip select signal (SA).
0) (slave select signal) terminal A3 (see FIG. 61). The wiring connected to the terminal A1 is a data line 194 (194a, 1) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXA).
94b), the wiring connected to the terminal A2 becomes the clock line 195 (195a, 195b) for transmitting the serial clock signal (CKA), and the wiring connected to the terminals A3, A4 becomes the chip select signal (SA0, SA1). ) For transmitting the chip select line 196
(196a, 196b). Since only serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal A1 is a terminal for serial data output, and the terminal for serial data input from the slave is omitted. .. The chip select signal is a signal for selecting a slave (IC chip) that enables an input operation or an output operation.

Serial signal line 174a from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 (see FIG. 6).
0) includes at least a data line 194 (signal line) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXA) and a clock line 195 (signal line) for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKA).

The serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a serial data signal (TXB) terminal B1, a serial clock signal (CKB) terminal B2, and a chip select signal (SB).
0) (slave select signal) terminal B3 is included (see FIG. 62). The wiring connected to the terminal B1 becomes the data line 211 for transmitting the serial data signal (TXB).
The wiring connected to 2 is a clock line 21 for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKB).
2, and the wiring connected to the terminal B3 becomes the chip select line 218 for transmitting the chip select signal (SB0).

Since only serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal B1 is a terminal for serial data output, and the terminal for serial data input from the slave is omitted. .. When the serial port 173b performs serial communication with only one IC chip (slave), the chip select signal and its chip select line 218 can be omitted.

Serial signal line 174b from the serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111 (see FIG. 6).
0) includes at least a data line 211 (signal line) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXB) and a clock line 212 (signal line) for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKB).

[Circuit diagram for serial communication between gaming microcomputer and driver]
FIG. 61A is a circuit diagram related to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and each driver in the game control device 100, and an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around the game microcomputer 111 and each driver IC chip. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates. FIG. 61A shows the external information signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111, the LED drive signal of the collective display device 50, the transmission status of the LED drive signal to the performance display device 152, and the like. The LED drive signal is a signal to the digit line and the segment line of the collective display device 50 or the performance display device 152.

Each of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 is a 16-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit that converts a serial data signal (TXA) from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 into a parallel data signal. The driver IC chips 156 and 157 may be general ones having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The shift register is composed of, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and the bit data of one D-type flip-flop moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop in synchronization with the serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit includes, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and latches (holds) and captures (sets) 16-bit data in the shift register at a predetermined latch timing for receiving a latch signal.

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 are cascade-connected (multistage connection), and the driver IC chip 156 constitutes the first stage and the driver IC chip 157 constitutes the second stage. Serial data signal (TXA) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data line 194a
Is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 156, and the driver IC chip 15
After passing through the No. 6 shift register, the data can be output from the output terminal DOUT. I for driver
The serial data signal (TXA) output from the output terminal DOUT of the C chip 156 is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 157 and passes through the shift register of the driver IC chip 157.

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 have the same serial clock signal (CKA) from the clock line 195a and the same chip select signal (SA from the chip select line 196a).
0), the same reset signal (RESET) from the reset line 197a is input in parallel to the respective input terminals SCK, input terminals /CS and input terminals /RESET. In addition, "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. The shift registers of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 operate in synchronization with the same serial clock signal (CKA). IC chip for driver 156,15
The parallel data latch circuit 7 has the same chip select signal (SA0) as the latch signal.
The data in the shift register is fetched at the timing (latch timing) at which is received. The data fetched by the parallel data latch circuits of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 are parallel output terminals (PA0-PA7, PB0-P) as 16-bit parallel data.
It is output simultaneously from B7). Therefore, the two driver IC chips 156 and 157 are
In total, it becomes a 32-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the serial data signal (TX
A) will be converted into 32-bit parallel data. Further, the driver IC chips 156 and 157 are simultaneously reset (initialized) by the reset signal from the Schmitt buffer 125, and the internal data is cleared.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, the terminals PA0-PA7, PB0-
PB2 is connected to terminals S17-S7 of connector part 181 (CN3), respectively. The terminals S17-S7 of the connector portion 181 (CN3) are connected to the external information terminal 71 by an electric wire such as a cable. Therefore, the parallel output terminals PA0-PA of the driver IC chip 156 are
7, signals from PB0-PB2 are transmitted to the external information terminal 71 as external information AK (external information signal). In this way, the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 form a driver 138d (FIG. 60). The terminal PB3 of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156 supplies a door signal indicating the opening of the glass frame 15 or the like.

For example, the external information AK includes a calling signal, an out signal, a security signal, a main prize ball signal, a jackpot signal 4, a jackpot signal 3, a jackpot signal 2, a jackpot signal 1, a start signal, respectively.
It is a symbol confirmation frequency signal and a door/frame opening signal. The calling signal is a signal for calling an attendant in the game hall (hall), and the out signal is a signal based on the detection of the out ball detection switch 74. The security signal is a signal transmitted when there is a fraud or an error such as a magnet fraud or radio wave fraud. The main prize ball signal is a signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the model as jackpot information, and are turned on at the start of the jackpot and turned off at the end of jackpot or at the end of time saving. It is a good signal. The starting port signal is the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2
It is a winning signal at the starting opening based on the detection of the switch 37a, the symbol determination number signal is a signal indicating the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed (the number of symbol determination), and the door/frame opening signal is the glass frame opening. This is a signal indicating the opening of the glass frame 15 or the front frame (game frame) 12 by the detection switch 63 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch).

The security signal, the main prize ball signal, the starting opening signal, the door/frame opening signal, and the symbol determination frequency signal may be set in the external information editing process (A1319) of the timer interrupt process.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, the terminals PB4 to PB7 are connected to the terminals L9 to L12 of the connector section 185 (CN4) via the gate driver 183, respectively. The connector part 185 (CN4) is a collective display device 50 using an electric wire such as a cable.
Connect to. The parallel output terminals PB4 to PB7 are connected to the LED lamps (D
1-D18) is electrically connected to the digit line (LED digit 0-3) to which the cathode terminal is connected. Thus, the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PB4 to PB7 are connected to the driver 138c.
(FIG. 60).

The first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (lamp D1) and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50.
Since the (lamp D1) is a 7-segment type (87-segment type when the dot Dp is inserted) display, the collective display device 50 can be regarded as a 4-digit×8-segment LED display and can be controlled. In this case, the digit line (LED digit 0-3) selects a digit.

The gate driver 183 is used for signal amplification and the like, and is also used for terminals PB4 to PB7.
The wiring from is branched in two directions. The pull-up resistor R1 is connected to the wiring from the terminals PB4 to PB7. The input terminals I3 and I7 of the gate driver 183 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB4 of the driver IC chip 156, the input terminals I2 and I5 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB5 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminal I1 and I8 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB6 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminals I4 and I6 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB7 of the driver IC chip 156. The signals at the input terminals I1-I7 are amplified and output from the output terminals O1-O7. The output terminals O5-O7 related to the digit lines are connected to the terminals L9-L12 of the connector portion 185 (CN4), while the output terminals O1-O4 related to the digit lines are a 4-digit 7-segment type (including the dot Dp. It is connected to the digit line (digit 0-3) of the performance display device 152 which is an LED display of 8 segment type. The cost can be reduced by sharing the terminals PB4 to PB7 with the digit line (digit 0-3) of the performance display device 152 and the digit line (LED digit 0-3) of the collective display device 50.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157, the terminals PA0 to PA7 are connected to the terminals L1 to L8 of the connector section 185 (CN4) via the resistor R2. The connector portion 185 (CN4) is connected to the collective display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable. The parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 are electrically connected to the segment lines (LED segments 0-7) to which the anode terminals of the LED lamps of the collective display device 50 are connected. As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 157, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PA0 to PA7 form the driver 138b (FIG. 60).

A current is supplied to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line (LED segment 0-7) of the collective display device 50, and the current is drawn from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential through the digit line (LED digit 0-3). Then, a current flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method) to turn on the LEDs.

Further, among the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157, the terminals PB0-PB7 are
Each is electrically connected to a segment line (ag, Dp) of the performance display device 152 which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) LED display. In this way, the shift register of the driver IC chip 157, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PB0 to PB7 form the driver 150 (FIG. 60).

By supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment lines (ag, Dp) of the performance display device 152 and drawing the current from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential through the digit lines (digits 0-3). A current is applied to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method to be turned on. In this way, the performance display device 152 can display the probability setting value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls as a performance display.

As described above, the external information signal, the LED drive signal of the collective display device 50 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line), the LED drive signal of the performance display device 152 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line) is for gaming. The microcomputer 111 transmits the serial data signal (TXA) synthesized by the output processing (A1306) and the like, and transmits it, and the driver IC chips 156 and 157.
Is output as a parallel data signal.

FIG. 61B is a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the solenoid driver 138a in the game control device 100, and an electric circuit (electronics) around the game microcomputer 111 and the IC chip for the solenoid driver. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates a circuit.
The situation of transmission of the solenoid drive signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 is shown.

The IC chips 138a-1 and 138a-2 for the solenoid driver are drivers (drive circuits) 138a (FIG. 60) that generate and output solenoid drive signals as parallel data signals.
). The IC chip 138a-1 is a general 8-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). I
The C chip 138a-2 is an IC by Darlington connection in which a plurality of transistors are directly connected.
A Darlington current amplifier that amplifies the current signal from chip 138a-1.

Serial data signal transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 by the data line 194b (
TXA) is input to the input terminal SI of the IC chip 138a-1, and the IC chip 138a-1
Pass through the shift register. Input terminal SCK of IC chip 138a-1, input terminal/G
, A serial clock signal (CKA), a gate signal (GATE) as an enable signal, and a reset signal from the Schmitt buffer 125 are input to the input terminal /SCLR, respectively, the clock line 195b, the enable signal line 198b (198), and the reset line. It is input by 197b. The data line 194b may be branched from the data line 194a (FIG. 61A), and the clock line 195b may be branched from the clock line 195a (FIG. 61A).

The shift register of the IC chip 138a-1 operates according to the serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit of the IC chip 138a-1 fetches the data of the shift register by the chip select signal (SA1) input to the input terminal RCK. The chip select signal (SA1) here functions as a latch signal. IC chip 138
When the gate signal (GATE) is input, the data taken into the parallel data latch circuit a-1 is converted into a parallel output terminal (QA-Q) as an 8-bit parallel data signal.
H). The gate signal (GATE) functions as an enable signal that enables the output of the IC chip 138a-1. When the gate signal (GATE) is input to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer, a parallel data signal is output from the parallel output terminals (QA-QH) via the output circuit capable of output operation. Further, the IC chip 138a-1 is reset by the reset signal and the internal data is cleared.

Among the parallel data signals generated from the serial data signal (TXA) by the IC chip 138a-1, the signal from the parallel output terminal QE is a payout control as a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball by the ball launching device. It is output to the device 200. The signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC are output as a special winning opening solenoid drive signal, a lever solenoid drive signal, and a universal solenoid drive signal, respectively. In other words, the special winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the universal electric solenoid drive signal are included in the serial data signal (TXA) from the gaming microcomputer 111 and transmitted, and the IC chip 138.
It is output as a parallel data signal by a-1. Even if the number of solenoids varies depending on the model of the gaming machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 11).
Since the data is output by serial communication from 1a), the wiring required for parallel communication can be reduced and the game control device 100 (game control means) can be easily shared between different models.

Here, the special winning opening solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the special winning opening solenoid 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39, and the lever solenoid driving signal drives the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86. The normal electric solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37.

The IC chip 138a-2 amplifies the special winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the universal solenoid drive signal from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1. The drive signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1 are
Each is input to the input terminals J1-J3 of the IC chip 138a-2 via the resistor R4, and after amplification, output from the output terminals K1-K3. The special winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid driving signal, and the ordinary electric solenoid driving signal from the output terminals K1-K3 are not only transmitted to the special winning opening solenoid 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, respectively.
It is also transmitted to the relay board 70 (FIG. 60).

[Circuit diagram related to serial communication between gaming microcomputer and relay board]
FIG. 62 exemplifies a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the relay board 70 in the game control device 100 (main board), and also the game microcomputer 111 and the connector section 1
It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit (electronic circuit) of the periphery of 60 (CN1).

As the serial signals output from the terminals B1-B3 of the serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111, the serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), and the chip select signal (SB0) are respectively in the connector section 160 (CN1). ) Serial data signal (TXB) terminal D7 (signal terminal), serial clock signal (CKB) terminal D6
The signal is transmitted to the (signal terminal) and the terminal D3 (chip select terminal) for the chip select signal (SB0) via the buffer 133. When the serial port 173b performs serial communication with only one IC chip (slave), the chip select signal and the chip select line 218 for transmitting the chip select signal may be omitted in some cases.

The serial data signal (TXB) includes a test shot test signal transmitted to the relay board 70 electrically connected to the connector unit 160 (CN1). Unlike the conventional parallel data signal, the test shooting test signal for the gaming machine 10 is transmitted as a serial data signal (TXB) from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the relay board 70. The test shooting test signal is a signal in which information necessary for the test shooting test, such as on/off information of various switches in FIG. 60, is fetched by the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 111a) and is collected and transmitted as serial data. Therefore, even if the number of switches is different for each model of the gaming machine 10, the wiring for each switch required in the case of parallel communication can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) is shared between different models. It becomes easy to make.

The serial data signal (TXB) is converted into a parallel data signal in the relay board 70, and then output to a test-shooting test apparatus that carries out a test-shooting test. Therefore, it is easy to share the relay board 70 between different models only by preparing wiring required for serial communication in advance on the relay board 70 (relay means).

As the above-mentioned various switches, there are a gate switch 34a, a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a winning opening switch 35a, a special winning opening switch 39a, a specific area switch 72, a residual ball discharging opening switch 73, and the like. The solenoid drive signal as the test shot test signal is transmitted from the driver 138a to the relay board 70 by another route as described above.

In the timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program, a part of the game control program) of FIG. 6A, information on/off of various switches (on/off signal) is the game microcomputer 111 (CP).
U111a) is input and taken in (input processing (A1303), winning opening switch/state monitoring processing (A1310)), and then transmitted as a test firing test signal of serial data (
Output processing (A1306)).

Further, as the test-firing test signal transmitted in the output process (A1306) of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program), the symbol data (A3403, A35) corresponding to the stop symbol number.
03), a signal related to the fluctuation start of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (set with A3205, A3210), a signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (set with A2609), special figure 1 and special figure 2 A signal about the start of a big hit (set by A2610), a signal about a right-handed or left-handed instruction (on/off of the firing position designation signal 1) (set by A2610, A2614, etc.), a signal about the opening and ending of the special winning opening (ON/OFF of the signal during operation of special electric accessory 1) (A2611)
, A2613)).

Further, as the test-shooting test signal transmitted in the output process (A1306), a signal regarding the start and end of the universal figure variation display game, a signal regarding the start of the universal electric operation and the end of the universal electric operation (normal electric accessory 1 in-operation signal). ON/OFF), a signal regarding the start and end of the high probability state (special symbol 1 ON/OFF of the high probability state signal, special symbol 2 ON/OFF of the high probability state signal), a signal regarding the start and end of time saving (special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON/OFF, ON/OFF of special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal, ON/OFF of normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, ON/OFF of ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal), gaming machine error state signal and the like.

The test shooting test signal for the gaming machine 10 is transmitted to the relay board 70 as a serial data signal (TXB) via the connector section 160 (CN1).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a terminal OE to which an enable line 214 (enable wiring) that enables the operation of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 (predetermined circuit) provided on the relay board 70 is connected. Enable signal (O output from the terminal OE of the gaming microcomputer 111)
E) is a terminal D2 (enable terminal) for the enable signal of the connector section 160 (CN1)
Are transmitted via the buffer 133. The wiring to which the enable signal is transmitted is referred to as an enable line 214. The pull-up resistor R is connected to the enable line 214 before connecting to the buffer 133.

Further, the reset signal (RESET) from the Schmitt buffer 125 is transmitted via the buffer 133 to the reset signal terminal D10 (reset terminal) of the connector unit 160 (CN1). The wiring through which the reset signal is transmitted is referred to as a reset line 216 (reset wiring).

In addition to the above, the connector portion 160 (CN1) is provided with a grounding ground terminal D1 for grounding.
It has D4, D5, D8, D9 and power supply terminals D11, D12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

The buffer 133 is a three-state buffer, and the input to the /1G terminal is L level (
GND), the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4 is output as it is from the output terminals 1Y1-1Y4, and when the input to the /1G terminal is at the H level, A high impedance state is established between 1A1-1A4 and the output terminals 1Y1-1Y4, and they are electrically disconnected. The buffer 133 outputs the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals 2A1-2A4 as it is when the input to the /2G terminal is at the L level (GND).
When the output from 1-2Y4 and the input to the /2G terminal is at the H level, the input terminal 2A1-
2A4 and the output terminals 2Y1-2Y4 are in a high impedance state and are electrically disconnected. In addition, "/" indicates a negative logic terminal.

The buffer 133 corrects and outputs the voltage of the logical value (L level or H level) and is provided as an option. When the wiring between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the connector section 160 (CN1) is short, the buffer 133 is a buffer. 133 becomes unnecessary.

In FIG. 62, since the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are L level (GND), the signals input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4 and 2A1-2A4 are output terminals 1Y1-1Y4, respectively.
, 2Y1-2Y4. Therefore, the reset signal (RESET), the serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), the chip select signal (SB0), and the enable signal (OE) are respectively input terminals 1A1, 1A3, 1A2, 1 of the buffer 133.
It is input to A4, 2A1 and output from the output terminals 1Y1, 1Y3, 1Y2, 1Y4, 2Y1 toward the connector section 160 (CN1). Output terminal 1Y for reset signal (RESET)
1, output terminal 1Y3 for serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB
) Output terminal 1Y2, chip select signal (SB0) output terminal 1Y4, and enable signal (OE) output terminal 2Y1 are respectively connected to the terminal D1 of the connector section 160 (CN1).
0, terminal D7, terminal D6, terminal D3, and terminal D2 are connected by wiring.

[Wiring example 1]
FIG. 63 is a wiring example between the connector section 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 on the board (that is, the main board and the main board) of the game control device 100 (
It is a figure explaining wiring example 1) based on the position (physical arrangement) where wiring is actually arranged.

In this embodiment, the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is a general double-sided printed board (double-sided board). In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate. The circuit components may be arranged on both surfaces or the bottom surface of the substrate. In the printed circuit board (double-sided circuit board) as the main circuit board, the data line 211 and the clock line 21
The wirings such as 2, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 and the terminals connected to these are arranged on the upper surface of the upper surface (front side, upper layer) and the lower surface (back side, lower layer) (
It can be the bottom). The board (main board) of the game control device 100 may be a general multilayer printed board (multilayer board). In this case, in the printed circuit board as the main board, the wirings such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are the outer layers (top layer, surface layer). ), the two inner layers (inner layer) serve as a power layer and a ground layer (ground layer, GND layer).

The terminal to which the terminal of the connector section 160 (CN1) is connected by wiring is the buffer 1
When 33 is provided, it is a terminal of the buffer 133, but when the buffer 133 is not provided, it is a terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111.

When the buffer 133 is provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, the reset line 216 from the terminal D10, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are , A serial data signal (TXB) output terminal 1Y3, a serial clock signal (CKB) output terminal 1Y2, an enable signal (OE) output terminal 2Y1, and a reset signal (RESET) output terminal of the buffer 133, respectively. 1Y1 is connected to the output terminal 1Y4 for the chip select signal (SB0).

When the buffer 133 is not provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are each the game microcomputer 111. Of the serial data signal (TXB), the terminal B2 for the serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal OE for the enable signal (OE), and the terminal B3 for the chip select signal (SB0). The reset line 216 from the terminal D10 is a reset signal (RESET) in a place other than the gaming microcomputer 111.
However, the position of the terminal RESET may be different from that of FIG. 63.

As described above, the connector unit 160 (CN1) includes the enable line 214 and the plurality of signal terminals D6 and D7 to which the clock line 212 (signal line) and the data line 211 (signal line) are respectively connected.
Is connected to the enable terminal D2 and the reset terminal 216 is connected to the reset terminal D10.
And

Further, the connector portion 160 (CN1) has a signal terminal D6 as compared with the enable terminal D2.
, D7 provided with ground terminals D4, D5. Since the distance between the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be widened by the ground terminals D4 and D5, and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5, the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded. It is possible to prevent or suppress interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between and.

The ground terminal D4 is closer to the signal terminal D6 (clock terminal) than the chip select terminal D3. The ground terminal D5 is closer to both the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the chip select terminal D3. The chip select terminal D3 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 are connected to the ground terminals D4 and D5.
Since the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5 while preventing the interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the chip select terminal D3 and the signal terminals D6 and D7, Can be suppressed.

Further, the connector section 160 (CN1) has a signal terminal D6 as compared with the reset terminal D10.
, D7 is provided near the ground terminal D8. The connector section 160 (CN1) is
The ground terminal D9 is provided closer to the signal terminal D7 (data terminal) than the reset terminal D10. The ground terminal D8, D9 allows the reset terminal D10 and the signal terminals D6, D
7 can be widened and the ground terminals D8 and D9 can shield the signal terminals D6 and D7. Therefore, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the reset terminal D10 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be prevented or Can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the printed circuit board (double-sided board), the connector portion 1 on the upper surface is used.
The ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, D9 of 60 (CN1) are connected to ground lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes or through vias and are grounded. The power supply terminals D11 and D12 on the upper surface are connected to power supply lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes or through vias. The ground line (not shown) connected to these ground terminals and the power line (not shown) connected to the power supply terminal may be present on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). When the main board is a multi-layer board, the connector unit 160 (CN1)
The ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, D9 are connected to the ground layer (ground layer, GND layer) inside the main board (printed board) by through holes or through vias. The power supply terminals D11 and D12 are connected to the power supply layer inside the main board (printed board) by through holes or through vias.

In the present embodiment, in the board (main board) of the game control device 100, interference with other wiring (
In order to reduce (crosstalk, crosstalk, influence), the data line 211 and the clock line 212, which have a high communication frequency and frequently transmit a pulse signal (high-speed serial signal), are arranged together, and the data line 211 and the clock line 212 are arranged. No other wiring exists between the (plurality of signal lines). The other wirings here are the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, etc. to which the pulse signal is not frequently transmitted. Note that the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, that is, the minimum distance between the plurality of signal lines can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. The intervals (the minimum intervals that can prevent interference in order to make the wiring dense) are set.

On the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the interval W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (here, the clock line 212) near the enable line 214 is the data line 21.
1 is wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the clock line 212. In addition, the reset line 21
6 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) closer to the reset line 216 are wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN). Furthermore, the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) near the chip select line 218 is wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN).

The interval W2 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W2>W1).
(MIN)), and the interference between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) can be prevented. The interval W3 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W3>W).
1 (MIN)), interference between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. The interval W4 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W4>W1).
(MIN)), and interference between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. In particular, the relay board 70 from the connector section 160 (CN1) via an electric wire such as a cable.
Since the test shooting test signal is transmitted to the test shooting test, the test shooting test may be adversely affected unless interference is prevented.

The data line 211 (signal line) and the clock line 212 (signal line) are connected to the connector section 160.
(CN1) passes between the opposing terminals, but if the interval between the terminal and the signal line through which the connector section 160 (CN1) passes in the vicinity is also made larger than the interval W1 (MIN), it becomes a terminal. The interference (crosstalk) between the signal lines is prevented or reduced.

In the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the data line 211 and the clock line 2
12 (a plurality of signal lines), an enable line 214, a reset line 216, and a chip select line 218 are arranged in parallel in one direction (lateral direction) in a predetermined region 201. Note that the predetermined area 201 includes wiring (data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214
The reset line 216 and the chip select line 218 do not include a region between a terminal and a bending point where the reset line 216 and the chip select line 218 are bent from a state where they are aligned in one direction (horizontal direction) toward the terminal. In the predetermined area 201,
The distance W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) is wider than the distance W1 between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (W2>W1). The distance W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the distance W1 (W3>W1). further,
The distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the distance W1 (W4>W1). In this way, by adjusting the distance between the wirings, it is possible to make the interference (crosstalk) less likely to occur in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel and where interference (crosstalk) is likely to occur. In the present embodiment, in the predetermined area 201, the data line 211
The distance W1 between the clock line 212 and the clock line 212 corresponds to the minimum distance W1(MIN).

[Wiring example 2]
64 is a connector section 160 (CN) on the board (main board) of the game control device 100.
It is a diagram for explaining an example of wiring (wiring example 2) between 1) and the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 based on the position (physical arrangement) where the wiring is actually arranged. In wiring example 2,
A signal passing through each terminal is changed from the wiring example 1 of FIG.
The pattern of connector wiring to CN1) has also been changed.

In addition, in FIG. 64, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. 63. Therefore, the relationship of W2>W1(MIN), W3>W1(MIN), W4>W1(MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, W2>W1 and W3
The relationship of >W1, W4>W1 is established.

Specifically, in FIG. 64, the terminals for the serial data signal (TXB), the terminals for the serial clock signal (CKB), and the terminals for the enable signal (OE) are replaced with each other from the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63. There is. In the connector section 160 (CN1), the terminal D2 is a clock terminal for a serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal D6 is a data terminal for a serial data signal (TXB), and the terminal D7 is an enable terminal for an enable signal. Buffer 13
3 or the arrangement of the terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 are also interchanged from the wiring example 1 of FIG.

By replacing the terminals as described above, the connector portion 160 (CN1
), the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines) are collectively arranged on the outer side (right side), and the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 are also collectively arranged on the outer side (the other side). It is located on the left side). Therefore, in the wiring example 2 of FIG. 64, even if the left and right maximum widths of the connector wirings are the same as those of the wiring example 1 of FIG.
To the signal line (here, the data line 211), W2, between the reset line 216 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) W3, and between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211). W4 can be made wider than the wiring example 2 in FIG. 63, and the signal line (data line 211 or data line 211 or other line such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, or the chip select line 218, to which the pulse signal is not frequently transmitted, is frequently used. The effect of preventing interference by the clock line 212) is enhanced.

[Wiring example 3]
FIG. 65 is a connector section 160 (CN) on the board (main board) of the game control device 100.
It is a figure explaining the example of wiring (wiring example 3) between 1) and the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 based on the position (physical arrangement) where wiring is actually arranged.

In the present modification of FIG. 65, in the connector section 160 (CN1), the reset terminal and the chip select terminal are replaced from the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the terminal D3 becomes the reset terminal, and the terminal D10 becomes the chip select terminal. It has become.

In the wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, unlike the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the data lines 21 arranged together are arranged.
1 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines) are sandwiched from both sides, the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b are arranged. By electrically shielding (shielding) the plurality of signal lines from both sides with the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b, other wirings (enable line 214, reset line 216, chip select line 218, etc.) by the plurality of signal lines are provided. Interference (crosstalk) can be reduced. In order to reduce (prevent) interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, the ground terminal D9 is also provided between the data line 211 and the clock line 212.
A ground wire may be placed to connect to.

Further, in the wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, the ground line 222c is arranged outside the enable line 214 (on the side opposite to the clock line 212) and on the outside of the reset line 216 (on the side opposite to the data line 211). Are arranged. The enable line 214 is connected to the ground line 222a and the ground line 2
By sandwiching 22c from both sides and electrically shielding it, it is possible to reduce interference from other wiring to the enable line 214 (including the clock line 212, the data line 211, and the wiring not connected to the connector unit 160). Further, the reset line 216 is sandwiched by the ground line 222b and the ground line 222d from both sides and electrically shielded, so that other wirings to the reset line 216 (such as the clock line 212, the data line 211, and the connector section 160 are connected). Interference (including wiring not included) can be reduced.

The ground lines 222a-222d may be collectively referred to as ground lines. Data line 211
The clock line 212 and the enable line 214 are wirings used to output a test shooting test signal for the gaming machine, but may be generically called signal wirings. On the main board, each signal wiring (data line 211, clock line 212, and enable line 214) is sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings and arranged between them, and is shielded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) occurs between the signal wiring for outputting the test signal and another wiring, which adversely affects the test of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the ground line 222a is arranged between the one signal line (clock line 212) and the enable line 214, and the other signal line (data line 211) and the reset line 216 (and thus the chip select line 218). The ground line 222b is arranged between the two. Enable line 214
A ground line 222c is arranged outside the line, and a ground line 222d is arranged between the reset line 216 and the chip select line 218. The ground wire 222a is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D4. The ground wire 222b is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D1. The ground wire 222c is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D8. The ground wire 222d is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D5. These ground wires 22
2a, ground line 222b, ground line 222c, and ground line 222d are grounded terminals of the buffer 133 (2A2, 2A3, etc.) or grounded terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 (not shown).
The effect of the shield is further enhanced by being connected to.

Note that, in FIG. 65, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. 63. Therefore, the relationship of W2>W1(MIN), W3>W1(MIN), W4>W1(MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, W2>W1 and W3
The relationship of >W1, W4>W1 is established.

[Modification of wiring]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining a wiring example (modification example) in the case where the chip select line 218 is omitted, based on the position (physical layout) at which the wiring is actually arranged.

In this modification, in the connector section 160 (CN1), there is no chip select terminal, the terminal D3 is an enable terminal, and the terminal D2 is a ground terminal (FIG. 66(b).
)). Further, the positions of the terminals of the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 are also changed from FIG. 63 (FIG. 66(a)).

In this modification also, the relationship of W2>W1 (MIN) and W3>W1 (MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, W2>W1 and W3>W1
The relationship is established. Therefore, also in this modification, it is possible to reduce interference (crosstalk) by the data line 211 and the clock line 212 with other wirings (enable line 214 and reset line 216).

〔Relay board〕
FIG. 67 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit diagram of the relay board 70 and an electrical circuit (electronic circuit) around the connector unit 162 (CN2) and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

In the present embodiment, the relay board 70 is also a double-sided printed board (double-sided board) like the board (main board) of the game control device 100. In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the relay board 70. The circuit components may be arranged on both surfaces or the bottom surface of the relay board 70. In the relay board 70, wirings such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218, and the terminals connected to them are provided on the upper surface (front side, upper layer) and lower surface (back side, lower layer). It is placed on the upper surface (or the lower surface). The relay board 70 may be a general multilayer printed board (multilayer board). In this case, in the relay board 70, the data line 211 and the clock line 2
Wirings such as 12, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are arranged in the outer layer (uppermost layer, surface layer), and the inner two layers (inner layer) are the power source layer and the ground layer ( Ground layer and GND layer).

The connector portion 162 (CN2) of the relay board 70 is connected to the connector portion 160 (CN1) of the game control device 100 (main board) by an electric wire such as a cable. Connector part 162 (CN
2) The terminals F1-F12 are respectively the terminals D1-D12 of the connector section 160 (CN1).
It corresponds to and is electrically connected. The connector portion 162 (CN2) has ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, F9 for grounding and power supply terminals F11, F12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

In this embodiment, in the relay board 70 (double-sided board), the ground terminals F1 and F4 on the upper surface are formed.
, F5, F8, and F9 are connected to ground lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes or through vias and are grounded. The power supply terminals F11 and F12 on the upper surface are connected to power supply lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes or through vias. The ground line (not shown) connected to these ground terminals and the power line (not shown) connected to the power supply terminal may be present on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). In addition, the relay board 70
Is a multi-layer substrate, the ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, F9 are connected to the internal ground layer (ground layer, GND layer) by through holes or through vias. The power supply terminals F11 and F12 are connected to the internal power supply layer by through holes or through vias.

The serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), the chip select signal (SB0), the enable signal (OE), and the reset signal (RESET) from the connector section 160 (CN1) are respectively in the connector section 162 (CN2). Terminals F7, F6, F3, F2
, F10 to the data line 211, the clock line 212, the chip select line 218, the enable line 214, and the reset line 216.

The serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB), chip select signal (SB0), enable signal (OE), and reset signal (RESET) are stored in the buffer 19
It is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 via 1. Serial-parallel conversion circuit 1
Reference numeral 92 denotes a test firing test signal (serial data) included in the serial data signal (TXB),
It is converted into a parallel data signal and a test firing test signal as parallel data is output.

The buffer 191 is a three-state buffer like the buffer 133, and corrects and outputs a logical value voltage (L level or H level). The buffer 191 has input terminals NA1 to NA8 when the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are both at the L level (GND).
The logical value (L or H) of the input to the output terminal is output from the output terminals NY1 to NY8 as it is, and when any of the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal is at the H level, the input terminals NA1 to NA8 are input.
And the output terminals NY1-NY8 are in a high impedance state and electrically disconnected. In addition, "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. In FIG. 67, the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are both at the L level (GND), and the signals from the input terminals NA1 to NA8 are respectively output terminals NY.
Output from 1-NY8.

The reset line 216 and the data line 211 from the connector section 162 (CN2) are connected to the buffer 1
It is connected to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of 91. Reset signal of reset line 216 (RESE
T) and the serial data signal (TXB) of the data line 211 are input to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of the buffer 191, respectively, and output from the output terminals NY1 and NY2 to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

On the other hand, the clock line 212 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191. The serial clock signal (CKB) on the clock line 212 is input to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191, and the serial clock signal C is output from the output terminals NY3 and NY4.
It outputs as KB1 and CKB2 toward the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

The chip select line 218 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA5 and NA6 of the buffer 191. The chip select signal (SB0) of the chip select line 218 is stored in the buffer 191.
To the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 as chip select signals SB01 and SB02 from the output terminals NY5 and NY6.

The enable line 214 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA7 and NA8 of the buffer 191. The enable signal (OE) of the enable line 214 is input to the input terminal NA of the buffer 191.
7 and NA8, and output from the output terminals NY7 and NY8 as enable signals OE1 and OE2 toward the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

Before connecting to the buffer 191, a pull-up resistor R is connected to the data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214, reset line 216, and chip select line 218.

It should be noted that the relationship between the wirings in FIGS. 63 to 66 is based on the data line 211 on the relay board 70.
Between the clock line 212 and the clock line 212 or the minimum distance W1 (MIN), the distance W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (the data line 211 or the clock line 212) near the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the reset line 216. The signal line on the side close to the reset line 216 (data line 211
Alternatively, it is also applicable to the distance W3 with the clock line 212) and the distance W4 with the signal line (the data line 211 or the clock line 212) near the chip select line 218 and the chip select line 218. For example, between the connector unit 162 (CN2) and the buffer 191, W2
>W1(MIN), W3>W1(MIN), W4>W1(MIN), and W2>W1, W3>W1, W4 in the predetermined area 201 in which the wirings are arranged in parallel.
The relationship of >W1 is established. Therefore, even on the relay board 70, interference of the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) with other wirings such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 to which the pulse signal is not frequently transmitted is caused. The effect of prevention is strengthened.

The serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 is made up of 10 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j connected in cascade, and converts a maximum of 8×10-bit serial data signal (TXB) into a parallel data signal and a test firing test signal. Can be output as. The serial data signal (TXB) is sequentially serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-1.
Pass 92j.

Five 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e (first group)
And five 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j (second group)
Are respectively branched serial clock signals CKB1 and CKB2 and a chip select signal S.
B01, SB02 and enable signals OE1 and OE2 are simultaneously input in parallel. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e of the first group and the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j of the second group operate in synchronization, and at the same time, the parallel data signals (test firing test) are generated by the enable signals OE1, OE2. Signal) is output. Further, a reset signal (RESET) can be simultaneously input in parallel to each of the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j. That is, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192
To the serial-to-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j according to the reset signal for
Are reset (initialized) at the same time, and the internal data is cleared.

Each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is a general 8-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0) function as latch signals. The parallel data latch circuit fetches the data in the shift register in response to the chip select signals SB01 and SB02. Each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-1
The data taken in by the parallel data latch circuit 92j is the enable signal OE (OE
1 or OE2) is input, it is output as an 8-bit parallel data signal. By inputting the enable signal OE to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer,
A parallel data signal is output through the output circuit that is enabled for output operation.

When the chip select line 218 is not provided as shown in FIG. 66, the output circuit may be omitted and the enable signal OE (OE1 or OE2) may be used as the latch signal. The parallel data latch circuit of each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j takes in the data of the shift register at the timing when the enable signal OE is input as a latch signal, and outputs it as an 8-bit parallel data signal as it is.

When a latch clock is used as a latch signal for the chip select signals SB01, SB02 (SB0), a pulse signal is frequently transmitted to the chip select line 218 as well, so that the data line 211 and the clock line 212 are processed in the same manner. The chip select line 218 may also be included in the plurality of signal lines, and the data line 211, the clock line 212, and the chip select line 218 may be collectively arranged, and the relationship of W4>W1 (MIN) may not be established.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined circuit that enables the enable line 214 to operate is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 provided on the relay board 70, and the operation of the predetermined circuit is an output operation, but the operation is not limited to this. is not. For example, the enable line 214 or an separately provided enable line is connected to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal of the buffer 191, and the buffer 19
It is also possible to control an output operation or an input operation of 1.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game (variable display game) is a special result. The gaming machine 10 has a plurality of signal lines (for example, a data line 211 and a clock line 212) for communicating with a predetermined circuit (for example, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 192), and an enable line 21 that enables the operation of the predetermined circuit.
4 (or reset line 216 for resetting a predetermined circuit) and a substrate (for example, main substrate 100, relay substrate 70). On the substrate, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line near the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) is the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines. Wider than).

Since the minimum interval W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines is usually an interval that can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the plurality of signal lines, in the fourth embodiment, the enable line 214 ( Alternatively, the reset line 216) and the enable line 214 (or the reset line 2)
16), the distance W2 (or W3) from the signal line on the side closer to 16) is the minimum distance W1 (
By making the width wider than MIN), interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line can be prevented or suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the plurality of signal lines are clock lines 212 for performing serial communication.
And data lines 211. The data line 211 transmits a test signal regarding the gaming machine 10 (for example, a test shot test signal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent or suppress the interference from the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) with the test signal, which is an important signal, and prevent the adverse effect on the test of the gaming machine 10.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of signal lines (for example, the data line 211 and the clock line 212) are collectively arranged on the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100 and the relay substrate 70), and the enable line 21 is provided.
4 (or reset line 216) and the signal line, a ground line is arranged. Therefore, by shielding a plurality of signal lines with a ground line, the enable line 214 (or the reset line 2
It is possible to prevent or suppress interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between 16) and the signal line.

In the fourth embodiment, the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) includes the predetermined area 201 in which the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel. In the predetermined area 201, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line near the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216).
However, it is wider than the interval between the plurality of signal lines. Therefore, in the predetermined area 201 where the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel with each other and interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) is likely to occur, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) is less likely to occur. it can.

In the fourth embodiment, the board (for example, the main board 100) includes the connector unit 160 for connecting to another board (for example, the relay board 70) on which a predetermined circuit is installed. Connector part 16
0 is a plurality of signal terminals to which a plurality of signal lines are respectively connected, an enable terminal (or a reset terminal) to which the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) is connected, and an enable terminal (
Or a ground terminal (GND) closer to the signal terminal than the reset terminal). Therefore, the ground terminal (GND) can widen the space between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal, and prevent interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal. Or it can be suppressed. Also, the enable line 214 (or the reset line 21
6) and the signal line to increase the distance, and enable line 214 (or reset line 2
It is possible to suppress interference between 16) and the signal line.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game), and is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game is a special result. It is possible to generate a special game state. Game control means (eg game control device 1
00) is a game control program (for example, an interrupt processing program related to timer interrupt processing)
The game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing the above, and the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing the required arithmetic processing by the game control program. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) can output a test signal (for example, a test shooting test signal) related to the gaming machine 10 by serial communication by the game control program (output processing (A130).
6)).

Therefore, in the game control means (for example, the game control device 100), the number of wires (the number of signals) and the number of terminals (the number of pins) of the connector are reduced, and a sufficient space (place) for arranging electronic parts and the like can be secured, and the cost is reduced. It also leads to reductions. In the case of parallel communication, since it is necessary to provide wiring and terminals according to the type of data to be transmitted, the number of wiring (the number of signals) and the number of terminals of the connector (
The number of pins) becomes large.

In the fourth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) takes in signals from the switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 39a), and then performs serial communication as a test signal. Can be output with. Therefore, even if the number of switches is different for each model of the gaming machine 10, the signal from the switch is taken in by the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) and output as a test signal by serial communication, which is necessary in the case of parallel communication. It is possible to reduce the wiring, which is easy to share the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a relay unit (for example, a relay board 70) that converts a test signal as a serial data signal into a parallel data signal and then outputs the parallel data signal to a test device that performs a test. Therefore, it is easy to share the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) between different models only by preparing the wiring required for serial communication in advance in the relay means (for example, the relay board 70).

In the fourth embodiment, a serial data signal from an arithmetic processing unit (for example, the CPU 111a) is converted into a parallel data signal, and a light emitting unit (for example, the LED of the collective display device 50) or a solenoid (for example, a special winning opening solenoid 39b, a universal battery). Driving means (for example, driver IC chips 156 and 157, driver 1 that can output as a driving signal to the solenoid 37c)
38a-138d, 150). The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) outputs the serial data signal to the driving means from the first serial port (for example, the serial port 173a), and outputs the serial data signal to the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) to the second serial port (for example). For example, it is output from the serial port 173b).

Therefore, even if the number of solenoids varies depending on the model of the gaming machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is output from the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) by serial communication, so the wiring required for parallel communication is reduced. This makes it easy to share game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models. In addition, an arithmetic processing unit (for example, the CPU 111a)
) Outputs the serial data signal to the drive means and the serial data signal to the relay means from different serial ports, it is not necessary to create a serial data signal containing data for both the drive means and the relay means. The output processing to the drive means and the relay means is simplified.

Further, as described above, the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) sends the serial data signal to the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) to the first serial port (for example, the serial port 17).
3a) and a second serial port (for example, serial port 173b) different from the above. Therefore, parts related to the test shooting test (for example, the buffer 133 and the connector unit 16 as described above).
0) is not mounted at the time of mass production (other than at the time of inspection), the driving means (for example, drivers 138a-138d, 150) is connected to the first serial port (for example, serial port 173a).
External information terminal 71, collective display device 50, solenoids 39b and 37c, which are connected via
The control of 86b, the performance display device 152, etc. is not affected.

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player outputs a test signal (for example, a test shooting test signal) for the gaming machine 10. A substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) having signal wirings (for example, the data line 211, the clock line 212, and the enable line 214) for controlling is provided. On the substrate, the signal wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched by a plurality of ground wirings (for example, ground wires 222a-222d). Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent the situation where the signal wiring is shielded and the test of the gaming machine is adversely affected by noise or interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) on the signal wiring.

In the fourth embodiment, when the game stop result is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player is a predetermined circuit (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 19).
The board (for example, the main board 100, the relay board 70) having the enable wiring (for example, the enable line 214) capable of transmitting the enable signal that enables the operation of 2) is provided. On the substrate, the enable wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched by a plurality of ground wirings (for example, ground wires 222a-222d). Therefore, interference between the enable wiring and other wiring (crosstalk, crosstalk)
It is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which the predetermined circuit malfunctions due to the occurrence of.

In the fourth embodiment, when the game stop result is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player is a predetermined circuit (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 19).
2) Reset wiring capable of transmitting a reset signal for resetting (for example, reset line 216)
The substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) having the On the substrate, the reset wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched by a plurality of ground wirings. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which the predetermined circuit malfunctions due to interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the reset wiring and another wiring.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 25 Production Button 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 36 First Starting Winning Port (First Starting Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 50 collective display device (LED)
70 Relay Board 71 External Information Terminal 72a First Proximity Switch 72b Second Proximity Switch 72c Third Proximity Switch 72d Fourth Proximity Switch 100 Game Control Device (Main Board)
152 Performance display device 160, 162 Connector part 173a, 173b Serial port 174a, 174b Serial signal line 191 Buffer 192 Serial parallel conversion circuit 200 Discharge control device 201 Predetermined area 211 Data line 212 Clock line 214 Enable line 216 Reset line 300 Performance control device (Sub board)
800 rotating unit 801 tray part,
802 rolling surface 805 accommodating portion 806 extending portion 807 guiding groove 810 rotating stage 811 rolling surface 812 notch portion (holding portion)
820 Gate valve 830 Obstacle nail 840 Bounce member 850 Distribution device 851 First branch flow path 853 First switching valve 860 First distribution unit 864 Second intake flow path 865 Second branch flow path 866 Second switching valve 870 Second distribution unit 871 (871A-871D) Sorting mechanism 872 (872A-872D) Inlet port 873 (873A-873D) Outlet port 875 Third switching valve 876 Rotating member 883 Stopper member 890 Second rotating stage 891 Second notch (second) 2 holding part)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game stop result is a special result,
A plurality of signal lines for communicating with a predetermined circuit, and a substrate on which an enable line enabling the operation of the predetermined circuit is wired,
In the board, a space between the enable line and the predetermined signal line is wider than a minimum space between the plurality of signal lines.